You are on page 1of 429

MCI 8101

MARINE CORPS INSTITUTE


STAFF NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS
CAREER DISTANCE EDUCATION PROGRAM

LEADERSHIP AND
ADMINISTRATION

MARINE BARRACKS
WASHINGTON, DC
LEADERSHIP ANDADMINISTRATION (8101)
Course Introduction

Scope The responsibilities of SNCOs increase with every rank reached. As an NCO,
you will need continuing education on a variety of subjects to master these
additional responsibilities.

Technical and tactical proficiency is the hallmark of the Marine Gunnery


Sergeant. This course covers a wide range of subjects that will enhance your
abilities in maintaining the high standards expected of the senior non-
commissioned officer ranks.

References The following references were used in the writing of this course:

• MCRP 6-11B w/ch1, Marine Corps Values: A User's Guide For


Discussion Leaders.
• MCO P1070.12K w/ch1, Individual Records Admin Manual (IRAM).
• MCCS, http://www.usmc.mccs.org.
• Key Volunteer Network, HQ Bn. Volunteer Program, Henderson Hall.
• Navy Marine Corps Relief Society, http://nmcrs.org.
• Employee/ Member Self Service, http://emss.dfas.mil.
• MCO 1740.13B, Family Care Plans.
• Internal Revenue Service, IRS, http://www.irs.gov.
• Volunteer Income Tax Assistance, VITA, Marine Barracks, Washington,
D.C.
• United Service Organizations, USO, www.uso.org/
• Marine Corps Command Center, MCCC. HQMC. Arlington, VA.
• Tricare, http://www.tricareonline.com/
• United Concordia, www.ucci.com.
• American Red Cross, www.redcross.org.
• DOD FMR Department of Defense Financial Management Regulations
• Navy Mutual Aid Association
• www.navymutual.org
• Navy Federal Credit Union

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 i Course Introduction


Course Introduction, Continued

References, • MCO 6100.12, Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body Composition
continued Program Manual.
• MCO P1900.16F, Separation and Retirement Manual.
• MCO 1080.35F, Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual.
• MCO 5000.12D, Pregnancy and Parenthood.
• MCO P10110.17C W/CH 1 & 2, Marine Corps Nutrition and Menu
Planning Manual.
• NSCA, Quick Series Guide to Basic Weight Training Guide.
• NSCA, Quick Series Guide to Performance Nutrition.
• NSCA, Quick Series Guide to Aerobic Training.
• MCO P1610.7E w/erratum and ch 1-8, Performance Evaluation System
(PES).
• SECNAVINST 5210.11D, Department of the Navy File Maintenance.
Procedures and Standard Subject Identification Codes (SSIC).
• SECNAVINST 5215.1C, Directives Issuance System.
• SECNAVINST 5216.5D, Department of the Navy Correspondence Manual.
• MCO 5210.11D, Records Management Program for the Marine Corps.
• MCO 5215.1H, Marine Corps Directives.
• MCO 5600.20M w/ch1, Marine Corps Warfighting Publications System.
• MCO 5600.49, Marine Corps Doctrinal Proponency.
• MCBUL 5600, i, canc: Nov 03.
• UM-MCPDS 5605, Marine Corps Publications Distribution System
(MCPDS) Users Manual.
• TBS Student Handout, B0142, The Marine Corps Directives System.
• PERSONNEL ADMIN SCHOOL
• Lesson Plan A0301 Prepare File Folder
• Lesson Plan A0302 Files Outline
• Student Outline Directives
• Covey, Stephen R., The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People: Simon
and Schuster, 1989.
• AR 25-50, Preparing and Managing Correspondence.
• DA Pamphlet 600-67, i.
• Effective Army Writing Subcourse Number IS1460 Edition A, Center for
Army Leadership, Command and General Staff College, Fort Leavenworth,
Edition Date: June 1999.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 ii Course Introduction


Course Introduction, Continued

Table of The following is the table of contents for this course.


Contents

Study Unit Title Page


-- Course Introduction i
1 Introduction to Leadership 1-1
2 Proficiency and Conduct Marks 2-1
3 Evaluating Personal and Family Readiness 3-1
4 Financial Planning 4-1
5 Weight Control and Military Appearance 5-1
6 Personnel Records 6-1
7 Files, Directives, and Publications 7-1
8 Effective Communications 8-1
Review Lesson Exercise R-1

Estimated You will spend about 21 hours, 40 minutes completing this course. This
Study Time includes the time you will need to study the text, complete the exercises, and
take the final examination.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 iii Course Introduction


Course Introduction, Continued

Reserve You earn 7 retirement credits for completing this course. You earn reserve
Retirement retirement credits at the rate of one credit for each 3 hours of estimated study
Credits time.

Note: Reserve retirement credits are not awarded for the MCI study you do
during drill periods if awarded credits for drill attendance.

Summary The table below summarizes all-important “gateways” needed to successfully


complete this course.

Step When you… Then you will… For more


information…
1 Enroll in the program Receive your Refer to the Program
program material Introduction
2 Complete the self- Arrange to take the Refer to the Program
paced text final examination Introduction
3 Pass the final Receive a course Refer to the Program
examination completion Introduction
certificate

MCI Course 8101 iv Course Introduction


STUDY UNIT 1
INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP
Overview

Estimated 1 hour, 10 minutes


Study Time

Unit Scope This study unit discusses the philosophy, foundation, and ethics of leadership.
It also outlines the differences in leadership styles. This unit then reviews the
role of the staff noncommissioned officer (SNCO) relative to seniors and
subordinates.

Learning After completing this study unit, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify characteristics of leadership.

• Identify the role of the SNCO.

In This Study This study unit contains the following lessons:


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Leadership Characteristics 1-3
Lesson 2 Role of Staff Noncommissioned Officers (SNCOs) 1-13

MCI Course 8101 1-1 Study Unit 1


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 1-2 Study Unit 1


LESSON 1
LEADERSHIP CHARACTERISTICS
Introduction

Estimated 20 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the characteristics and foundations of leadership.
Leadership has two objectives: mission accomplishment and troop welfare.
As a leader, you must have some tools to evaluate the climate of leadership in
your unit.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the four indicators of leadership.

• Identify the Marine Corps leadership traits.

• Identify the Marine Corps leadership principles.

• Identify the Marine Corps leadership styles.

Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 1-3
Leadership Indicators 1-4
Leadership Traits 1-5
Leadership Principles 1-7
Leadership Styles 1-9
Lesson 1 Exercise 1-10

MCI Course 8101 1-3 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1


Leadership Indicators

Four Indicators The four indicators of leadership are

• Morale
• Esprit de corps
• Discipline
• Proficiency

Morale Morale is the individual’s state of mind. It depends on the Marine’s attitude
toward everything.

Esprit de Corps Factors that constitute morale are loyalty to, pride in, and enthusiasm for the
unit shown by its members. Whereas, morale refers to the Marine’s attitude,
esprit de corps is the unit spirit.

Discipline Discipline is the individual or group attitude that ensures prompt obedience to
orders and the initiation of appropriate action in the absence of orders.

Proficiency Proficiency is the technical, tactical, and physical ability of the Marine and
the unit to perform the assigned mission.

MCI Course 8101 1-4 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1


Leadership Traits

Traits The Marine Corps recognizes 14 leadership traits:

• Bearing
• Courage
• Decisiveness
• Dependability
• Endurance
• Enthusiasm
• Initiative
• Integrity
• Judgment
• Justice
• Knowledge
• Loyalty
• Tact
• Unselfishness

Bearing Bearing is presenting a favorable impression at all times in carriage,


appearance, and personal conduct.

Courage Courage is recognizing fear, danger, or criticism and despite them, proceeding
with calmness and firmness.

Decisiveness Decisiveness is the ability to promptly decide and to communicate your


decisions in a clear and forceful manner.

Dependability Dependability is the certainty of proper performance of duty.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-5 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1


Leadership Traits, Continued

Endurance Endurance is mental and physical stamina measured by the ability to


withstand pain, fatigue, stress, and hardship.

Enthusiasm Enthusiasm is the display of sincere interest and exuberance in the


performance of duty.

Initiative Initiative is the ability to act in the absence of orders.

Integrity Integrity is characterized by uprightness of character, soundness of moral


principles, and honesty.

Judgment Judgment is the ability to weigh facts to reach sound decisions.

Justice Justice is rewarding and punishing according to the merits of the case in
question.

Knowledge Knowledge is the understanding of a science or an art and includes the


Marine’s range of information, professional knowledge, and understanding of
your Marines.

Loyalty Loyalty is faithfulness to yourself, your peers, subordinates, and seniors and
to your unit, the Corps, and your country.

Tact Tact is the ability to deal with others without creating offense.

Unselfishness Unselfishness is characterized by avoiding to provide for your own comfort


and personal advancement at the expense of others.

MCI Course 8101 1-6 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1


Leadership Principles

Principles Leadership principles are the guidelines a leader uses when selecting
appropriate actions and orders. As a leader, you must use and reinforce these
principles at all times.

• Proficiency
• Self-improvement
• Caring for others
• Communication
• Example
• Confirmation
• Teamwork
• Decisiveness
• Developing subordinates
• Knowing capabilities
• Initiative and responsibility

Proficiency Be technically and tactically proficient. Leaders must know their job
thoroughly and have a wide range of knowledge.

Self- Know yourself and seek self-improvement. Leaders must know their
Improvement weaknesses and strengths and must continually strive to increase their
technical and tactical knowledge.

Caring for Know your Marines and look out for their welfare. Leaders must know their
Others Marines both personally and professionally. Daily interaction gives some
indication of how their subordinates will function in a combat environment.

Communication Keep your personnel informed. The Marine who is well informed about the
mission, situation, and purpose of a particular task is more effective than one
who is not informed.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-7 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1


Leadership Principles, Continued

Example Leaders must convey good examples to their Marines and actively display
integrity, courage, physical fitness, discipline, professional competence, good
personal appearance, and exemplary personal conduct.

Confirmation Leaders must give clear and concise orders. Make sure the task is
understood, supervised, and accomplished. By proper supervision, leaders
make sure their orders are properly carried out.

Teamwork Train your Marines as a team. Before participating in an operation, ensure


that your Marines know their job and then train them to work together as a
team.

Decisiveness Make sound and timely decisions. The ability to make a rapid estimate of the
situation and to arrive at a sound decision is essential for all leaders.

Developing Develop a sense of responsibility among subordinates. Delegate authority


Subordinates and give your subordinates greater responsibilities.

Knowing Employ your command in line with its capabilities. Leaders must know the
Capabilities limitations and capabilities of their unit and employ it in accordance with
those capabilities.

Initiative and Seek and take responsibility for your actions and the actions of your unit. As
Responsibility a leader, you must be willing to take the initiative and take on added
responsibilities without receiving instructions from your superiors. Once you
take this initiative, you are responsible for the failure or success of your unit.

MCI Course 8101 1-8 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1


Leadership Styles

Definition Leadership style is the leader’s behavioral pattern as perceived by the Marines
who the leader is attempting to influence, guide, or direct.

Continuum of Leadership styles fall along a continuum; this continuum depicts two extreme
Styles leadership approaches:

• Autocratic - the leader makes all decisions for subordinates and tells them
what to do, how, when, where, etc.

• Democratic - the leader allows subordinates to decide within general or


mission type guidelines set by the senior.

Variation Between these two extremes are variations. These leadership style variations
depend on how much authority and direction is either kept by the leader or is
delegated to the subordinate. We can divide the continuum into four basic
styles.

• Telling - the leader makes the decision and announces it.

• Selling - the leader presents decision and invites questions.

• Participating - the leader presents problem, gets suggestions, and makes


decision.

• Delegating - the leader defines limits and permits subordinates to make


decisions.

MCI Course 8101 1-9 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 11 performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the following lists the four indicators of leadership?

a. Dedicated, competent, responsible, knowledgeable


b. Competent, discipline, esprit de corps, knowledgeable
c. Proficiency, morale, esprit de corps, discipline
d. Proficiency, morale, leadership, decisiveness

Item 2 Esprit de corps is best described as

a. guidelines for leadership principles.


b. a realistic approach to leadership.
c. enthusiasm and loyalty to the unit.
d. the projection of the leaders personality.

Items 3 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the definition from
Through 7 column 2 that best describes the leadership trait in column 1. The answers in
column 2 may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Leadership traits Definitions

___3. Bearing a. Action in the absence of orders


___4. Loyalty b. Faithfulness to country
___5. Initiative c. Favorable impressions
___6. Unselfishness d. Ability to reach sound decisions
___7. Judgment e. Avoiding to provide for your own
comfort

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-10 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 8 Keeping your personnel informed is which leadership principle?

a. Caring for others


b. Developing subordinates
c. Communication
d. Confirmation

Item 9 Knowing your Marines and looking out for their welfare is which leadership
principle?

a. Teamwork
b. Caring for others
c. Knowing capabilities
d. Self-improvement

Item 10 Leadership style can be defined as the leader’s _____ pattern as _____ by the
Marine who the leader is attempting to influence, guide, or direct.

a. physical, determined
b. behavioral, perceived
c. perception, acknowledged
d. behavioral, determined

Item 11 The leader defines limits and permits subordinates to make decisions can be
described as which leadership style?

a. Democratic
b. Telling
c. Autocratic
d. Delegating

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-11 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the correct answers to the exercise items. If you
have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 c 1-4
2 c 1-4
3 c 1-5
4 b 1-6
5 a 1-6
6 e 1-6
7 d 1-6
8 c 1-7
9 b 1-7
10 b 1-9
11 d 1-9

MCI Course 8101 1-12 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise


LESSON 2
ROLE OF STAFF NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (SNCOS)
Introduction

Estimated 30 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope The SNCOs are frequently referred to as the backbone of the Marine Corps.
In many respects, this is true, for the SNCO handles most of the day-to-day,
close supervision of the Marines in their platoons. This lesson describes the
professionalism and ethics SNCOs demonstrate in the conduct of day-to-day
operations with subordinates and seniors.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the characteristics of a professional.

• Identify the documents in which the military code of ethics may appear.

• Identify proper conduct of day-to-day supervision of subordinates.

• Identify SNCO responsibilities to seniors.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 1-13
Professionalism and Ethics 1-14
Responsibilities to Subordinates 1-16
Responsibilities to Senior SNCOs and Officers 1-20
Lesson 2 Exercise 1-21

MCI Course 8101 1-13 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Professionalism and Ethics

Definition of a Military professionals are people who have undergone special preparation and
Professional training. They have the knowledge on which professional actions are based
and the ability to apply that knowledge in a practical way. Their profession is
a means of earning a living, but wages do not become the primary purpose of
their work. The professional Marine must be competent, responsible, and
dedicated.

Why Is A Marine is a public servant who is responsible for the defense of the nation.
Professionalism A leader is responsible for the lives of their Marines. In combat, they may
Important? have to take risks, which endanger their lives to accomplish a mission. If
leaders are careless and have not conditioned themselves and trained their
followers to act professionally, a unit may suffer needless casualties.

A Marine, like other members of the armed services, must follow a unique
value system that sets them apart from the rest of society. This value system
is based upon obedience, courage, discipline, selflessness, and honor.

Careerists Careerists are Marines who seek advancement for their own sake and who see
it exclusively as a goal rather than an opportunity to do something of greater
value for their nation and the Marine Corps.

Occupation Marines for whom being a Marine is an occupation rather than a profession
Versus are motivated by money instead of the nature of the profession and its
Profession associated responsibilities.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-14 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Professionalism and Ethics, Continued

Problems Careerists and Marines who view their position as an occupation are hurting
the professional image Marines have developed in more than 220 years of
service to this country. These two types of Marines are harmful to unit
readiness and the individual’s ability to perform in combat. Leaders must
aggressively attack both problems by

• Objectively evaluating subordinates and counseling them accordingly

• Setting the example for subordinates and living a life according to the
military ethic

• Continually emphasizing the important and essential function of Marines:


keeping the nation secure

• Setting and enforcing standards that will not tolerate or support the actions
of careerists or those for whom being a Marine is just an occupation

Definition Ethics, generally interchangeable with morality, has been described as the
science that deals with conduct insofar as what is considered right or wrong,
good or bad. Webster defines ethics as the principles of conduct governing
an individual, profession, or group.

The Military The Marine Corps does not have a specific code written as one document.
Code of Ethics The Corps’ code or military ethic exists in many forms and documents. It is
primarily the ethical practices that society accepts and the legal system
supports. The following documents contain Marine Corps ethical practices:

• Oath of Office
• Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ)
• Code of Conduct
• Code of Ethics for Government Service

MCI Course 8101 1-15 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Responsibilities to Subordinates

Set the The SNCO is responsible for creating an environment that eliminates poor
Example performance of duty. The SNCO should continuously set the standard and
maintain an even temper.

The phrase do as I say, not as I do simply does not work. SNCOs following
such a philosophy only come across as hypocrites or phony to their
subordinates. The best subordinates will ignore them; the worst subordinates
will take license for their wrongdoings and multiply the problem.

The SNCO exhibits and demands professionalism by

• Knowing the boundaries of the SNCO position


• Providing continuous training, instructions, and counseling
• Supervising with an eye for matching subordinates with equivalent tasks
• Encouraging initiative
• Using the chain of command in two directions (up and down)
• Demonstrating integrity and fairness when dealing with others

Boundaries In addition to setting the standard and the example, SNCOs must know the
boundaries of their positions. SNCOs should be sure they always work with
seniors in a professional manner and clearly understand their own limits of
position relative to their seniors. SNCOs will not issue orders for which they
do not have the authority to enforce.

By issuing an order without the authority to enforce it, the SNCO can lose a
great deal of respect from subordinates and seniors when forced to withdraw
the order.

SNCOs must know what degree of authority has been granted to them and
what they are allowed to use as rewards and incentives. If you do not have
the authority to say when liberty is granted, when a person is going to be
promoted, or when a Marine is going to be selected to perform a highly
sought after task, be careful not to imply that you have this power.

You should make it clear to your subordinates that you do not have this
authority, but that your recommendations are generally accepted in these
areas. When a subordinate has accomplished an especially creditable piece of
work, make sure they get the proper reward in a timely fashion.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-16 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Responsibilities to Subordinates, Continued

Training, SNCOs must mold subordinates by providing constructive training, clear


Instructions, instructions, and continuous counseling. These three elements are essential to
and Counseling improve subordinates’ performance of duty and growth. Training builds
teamwork, confidence and enhances knowledge and skills. Clear instructions
ensure that requirements are easily understood and completed. Counseling
establishes communication with subordinates and provides detailed
explanation of what is required and expected in the performance of duty
standards.

Supervision The SNCO should observe all subordinates performing assigned duties and
evaluate subordinates daily to be sure they all are productive in their
assignment. The SNCO can then make changes when necessary.

Motivation and challenge are positive incentives to build and keep high
morale in the ranks of subordinates. Therefore, do not place Marines in jobs
for which they lack knowledge and skill or they will lose motivation. Nor
should you place Marines in jobs for which their ability, knowledge, and skill
far exceed the requirement to perform the job. Doing so removes the
challenge and deteriorates motivation.

The point is to match the Marine’s knowledge and skill with the required
tasks to provide challenging, but attainable jobs to each Marine.

Initiative For subordinates to reach their maximum potential, they must have the
opportunity to exercise their skills. The NCOs, especially, must be given the
opportunity to use their own initiative even though mistakes due to lack of
knowledge and experience as well as errors in judgment may occur.

SNCOs must provide opportunities for subordinates, NCOs in particular, to


demonstrate initiative instead of doing the job for the subordinate.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-17 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Responsibilities to Subordinates, Continued

Chain of For a Marine organization to work at maximum efficiency, the chain of


Command command must operate in two directions:

• Up – small problems can be brought to the attention of the command


without fear of consequences or a perception of seniors being
unapproachable or uncaring.

• Down – information flows openly all the way from the top of the chain to
the bottom.

Environment SNCOs must conduct day-to-day operations in an environment that

• Encourages subordinates to seek advice and counsel.


• Provides fair and impartial treatment.
• Accepts subordinates’ suggestion for improved performance.

Integrity SNCOs should be as good as their word at all times and in any circumstances.
On many occasions, subordinates will try to get you to compromise your
integrity. If you do so, they will be quick to take advantage of the situation
and tempt you repeatedly. Eventually their true feelings of disrespect and
contempt will appear. Once this occurs, it will be almost impossible for you
to regain your self-respect and your authority over them.

Your subordinates want you to do what is right, and they must know without
a doubt that they can depend on you to be consistent with your words in all
that you do.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 1-18 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Responsibilities to Subordinates, Continued

Fairness Fairness is another element necessary to build and maintain good leadership.
To relate to subordinates fairly, you must

• Treat people justly. This does not mean that you treat all Marines alike.
Instead, you must study your subordinates carefully. When you are
certain you have discovered all the factors that apply to the case, you
apply an appropriate corrective action. That action must neither be too
harsh nor too easy. It must be tailored to the situation and the individuals
involved and still be fair to all parties involved.

• Handle mistakes appropriately. When a subordinate makes a mistake,


examine the incident to determine the seriousness and the actions of the
individual Marine. If the Marine’s intentions were good and no signs
indicate that the mistake was the result of laziness or indifference, the
incident should be used as a training experience and not as an opportunity
to chastise or belittle that Marine.

• Exercise the privileges of rank with respect and dignity. When you desire
respect from Marines, be sure you treat them with equal respect. Build up
their self-respect. Overbearing and insulting treatment of subordinates are
signs of cowardly leadership. Consideration, courtesy, and respect from
leaders toward juniors are integral parts of discipline and good leadership.

MCI Course 8101 1-19 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Responsibilities to Senior SNCOs and Officers

Senior- As with the information, responsibilities flow up and down the chain of
Subordinate command. SNCOs, senior SNCOs, and officers must establish a mutually
Relationship supporting relationship. They must exhibit a large degree of trust,
confidence, and professional camaraderie between themselves. When this
exists, the strong points of each can be exploited for the good of the
organization, and shortcomings can be minimized.

Advisory Role SNCOs at all levels must provide seniors with essential feedback and advice
concerning problems within the unit and help seniors by supervising and
counseling enlisted personnel.

If the SNCO withholds advice for any reason or the senior perceives that his
position is being undermined, the command is prone to be negatively
impacted.

Professional If the SNCO and senior demonstrate any indication that they are not working
Bearing closely together, the other members of the unit will quickly sense it and may
try to play one person against the other to the detriment of all.

You must develop a mature, professional relationship based on mutual respect


and a regard for human dignity with your seniors. Above all, present
subordinates with a united front in all matters of concern to the organization.

Support Leaders make decisions every day involving not only the service, but the
morale and welfare of their subordinates. To demonstrate support for leaders
and successful mission accomplishment, SNCOs should express their

• Understanding of the decision-making process


• Understanding of their position in carrying out the senior’s policy
• Enthusiasm when communicating the information down the chain.

MCI Course 8101 1-20 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 A military professional must have which three characteristics?

a. Expertise, careerism, hard charging


b. Careerism, occupationalist, enforcer
c. Competent, responsible, dedicated
d. Expertise, ethics, thoughtful

Item 2 Readiness and the individual’s ability to perform in combat is affected


negatively by

a. careerism and professionalism.


b. professionalism and occupationalism.
c. careerism and occupationalism.
d. selfishness and individualism.

Item 3 Which documents contain Military Code of Ethics?

a. UCMJ, Code of Conduct, Oath of Office


b. DD214, FM 20-01, Military Leadership
c. Profession of arms, philosophy of leadership, command management
d. Civil disorders, combat training, conduct or inquiry

Continued on next page

MCI course 8101 1-21 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 SNCOs have the responsibility for molding subordinates into Marines.
Which of the following is a method that SNCOs use to mold their subordinate
Marines?

a. Promise of promotion
b. Displaying anger
c. Clear instructions
d. Showing favoritism

Item 5 SNCOs must conduct day-to-day operations in an environment that

a. encourages subordinates to seek advice and counsel.


b. clearly provides fair and impartial treatment.
c. accepts subordinates’ suggestions for improved performance.
d. all of the above.

Item 6 Which of the following describes the relationship between SNCO and senior?

a. Selfish and withholding


b. Informal and familiar
c. Supporting and trusting
d. Constructive and assuming

Continued on next page

MCI course 8101 1-22 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 c 1-14
2 c 1-14
3 a 1-15
4 c 1-17
5 d 1-18
6 c 1-20

MCI course 8101 1-23 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI course 8101 1-24 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise


STUDY UNIT 2
PROFICIENCY AND CONDUCT MARKS
Overview

Estimated 50 minutes
Study Time

Unit Scope This study unit introduces the Marine Corps counseling program. It also
discusses the procedures for advising Marines on recommending proficiency
and conduct marks.

Learning After completing this study unit, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the references that apply to proficiency and conduct mark
assignment.

• Identify standard of proficiency.

• Identify the steps for recommending proficiency and conduct marks.

• Identify standard of conduct.

In This Study This study unit contains the following lessons:


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Evaluating Marines 2-3
Lesson 2 Standards for Proficiency and Conduct Marks 2-11

MCI Course 8101 2-1 Study Unit 2


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 2-2 Study Unit 2


LESSON 1
EVALUATING MARINES
Introduction

Estimated 15 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses proficiency and conduct marks that play a prominent
role in determining the type of discharge an enlisted Marine will receive. As
an evaluation of our qualities and value to the Corps, comments and
recommendations have significant impact in promotion, assignment, and
career development. Therefore, it is imperative for any Marine in a
leadership role to be able to recommend or write appropriate evaluations, and
counsel other Marines concerning their performance. This lesson discusses
the reference and occasions for assignment of proficiency and conduct marks
for your Marines.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the reference that contains information on proficiency and
conduct marks.

• Identify the occasions that require proficiency and conduct marks.

• Identify the effective dates for the occasions.

• Identify the occasion codes.

• Identify the filing instructions for occasions.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 2-3 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1


Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 2-3
Counseling and Guidance 2-5
Recommending Proficiency and Conduct Marks 2-6
Lesson 1 Exercise 2-8

MCI Course 8101 2-4 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1


Counseling and Guidance

Who All Marines should be continuously counseled about their overall


performance of duty.

Why Counseling is an inherent part of leadership. It is also an opportunity to guide


those who have demonstrated the potential and desire for assignments of
increased responsibility toward a career decision.

When Counseling should begin when Marines first join a unit, continue at frequent
intervals during their tour of duty, and terminate only upon detachment.

Initial Session During the initial counseling sessions, the reporting senior should ensure that
the Marine understands the nature and extent of their duties, standards of
performance they are expected to achieve, and how the reporting senior will
judge their performance.

Subsequent In next sessions point out the degree to which the Marine has/has not met
Sessions established performance standards and any noteworthy achievements or
shortcomings to be corrected. All Marines have a vested interest in their
standing among their peers and any suggestions or opportunities open to them
for further career development.

Reference Guidelines for the assignment of proficiency and conduct marks are contained
in the MCO P1070.12_Individual Records Administration Manual (IRAM).

MCI Course 8101 2-5 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1


Recommending Proficiency and Conduct Marks

Procedure The table below lists the steps for recommending proficiency and conduct
marks.

Step Action
1 Determine the Marine’s last proficiency and conduct marks. This
gives the evaluator a base to build on.
2 Look at the charts in the IRAM. Refer to counseling sheets on the
Marine within the marking period.
3 Recommend proper marks.
4 Counsel the Marine on the recommended marks.
5 Forward the recommended marks up the chain of command.

Note: The commanding officer has the final say on the proficiency and
conduct marks the Marine actually receives.

Occasions The following table lists the occasions for submitting proficiency and conduct
marks on regular and reserve Marines. The table also contains the codes for
each occasion.

Regular Reserve
Occasion
Code Code
Transfer TR TR
Temporary Disability Retired List (TDRL) DL DL
Discharge DC DC
Promotion to Corporal or Sergeant PR PR
Reduction RD RD
Declared Deserter (first day of UA period) DD ---
Last Day Prior to Declaring Deserter PD ---
To TAD TD ---
TAD Complete TC ---
Change of Primary Duty CD CD
Service School Completion SC SC
Semiannual (reported 31 January and 31 July) SA ---
Annual (reported on 31 December) --- AN
Completion of Annual Training --- AT
Recommended (see MCO P1400.32) RE RE
Active Duty Special Work (ADSW) --- RT

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 2-6 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1


Recommending Proficiency and Conduct Marks, Continued

Filing The table below lists different situations where an occasion will take
Occasions precedence over another.

If… Then…
The effective date for transfer coincides with Transfer marks take
the requirement to report semiannual marks precedence
The Marine attends annual training within 90 Report annual marks
days of the effective date for reporting annual
marks
The Marine receives a mark for any other Report annual marks of
occasion within 90 days of the effective date Not Applicable
for reporting annual marks
The effective date for annual marks coincides Annual marks take
with any reporting occasion other than precedence
promotion or transfer

MCI Course 8101 2-7 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which reference contains guidelines and standards for assignment of conduct
and proficiency marks?

a. MCO P1080.35 Personnel Reporting Instruction Manual (PRIM)


b. MCO P1070.12 Individual Records Administration Manual (IRAM)
c. MCO 1610.11 Performance Evaluations, appeals Manual (PEAM)
d. MCO P1400.29 Marine Corps Promotion Manual (MARCORPROMAN)

Item 2 Which of the following are occasions for submitting proficiency and conduct
marks?

a. TAD 60 days or more and promotion


b. Enlistment and discharge
c. Company NJP and reduction
d. Completion of service school and discharge

Item 3 What are the effective dates when assigning semiannual proficiency and
conduct marks for regular Marines?

a. 31 January and 31 July


b. 1 January and 1 December
c. 1 July and 1 December
d. 1 October and 1 April

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 2-8 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 What is the regular and reserve code for transfer?

a. TRAN
b. TR
c. TF
d. TD

Items 5 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the filing instruction from
Through 8 column 2 that best matches the occasion in column 1. The answers in column
2 may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Occasion Filing Instruction

___5. If the effective date for transfer coin- a. Report annual marks
cides with the requirement to report b. Annual marks take
semi-annual marks precedence
___6. If the Marine attends annual training c. Transfer marks take
within 90 days of the effective date for precedence
reporting annual marks d. Report annual marks of
___7. If the Marine receives a mark for any Not Applicable
other occasion within 90 days of the
effective date for reporting annual marks
___8. If the effective date for annual marks
coincides with any reporting occasion
other than promotion or transfer

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 2-9 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 b 2-5
2 d 2-6
3 a 2-6
4 b 2-6
5 c 2-7
6 a 2-7
7 d 2-7
8 b 2-7

MCI Course 8101 2-10 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise


LESSON 2
STANDARDS FOR PROFICIENCY AND CONDUCT MARKS
Introduction

Estimated 15 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson will provide guidelines that are necessary to properly evaluate
Marines on proficiency and conduct. The IRAM sets the qualities and
standards for recommending these marks. However, the commanding officer
has the discretion to assign marks outside of these standards.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the qualities used to evaluate a Marine’s proficiency.

• Identify the qualities used to evaluate a Marine’s conduct.

• Identify the standards for proficiency and conduct and its corresponding
adjective rating.

In This Lesson The table below lists the topics covered in this lesson.

Topic See Page


Introduction 2-11
Proficiency Marks 2-12
Conduct Marks 2-14
Lesson 2 Exercise 2-17

MCI Course 8101 2-11 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2


Proficiency Marks

Qualities When recommending proficiency marks, all attributes of the Marine should
be considered.

• Mission accomplishment
• Leadership
• Intellect and wisdom
• Individual character
• Physical fitness
• Personal appearance

Education Completion of professional military education, Marine Corps Institute


courses, and off-duty education are evaluated and incorporated into the duty
proficiency mark.

Proper allowance should be made when a Marine is filling a billet


inconsistent with the Marine’s grade.

Evaluation For an honorable discharge, the Marine must display proficiency marks
Marks averaging at least 3.0. Any mark below 3.0 not supported by documentation
of a court-martial or non-judicial punishment requires an entry in the
Administrative Remarks of the Service Record Book, page 11.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 2-12 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2


Proficiency Marks, Continued

Standards The table below, guidelines from MCO P1070.12_ Individual Records
Administration Manual (IRAM), lists the recommended proficiency marks
and their corresponding adjective ratings.

Corresponding
Mark Adjective Standard of Proficiency
Rating
• Does unacceptable work in most duties
• Generally undependable
0 to 1.9 Unacceptable • Needs considerable assistance and close
supervision on even the simplest
assignment
• Does acceptable work in some duties but
not dependable
2 to 2.9 Unsatisfactory
• Needs assistance and close supervision on
all but the simplest assignments
• Handles routine matters acceptably
3 to 3.9 Below Average • Needs close supervision when performing
duties not of a routine nature
• Dependable in doing regular duties
thoroughly and competently
4 to 4.4 Average
• Usually needs assistance in dealing with
problems not of a routine nature
• Does excellent work in all regular duties
4.5 to 4.8 Excellent but needs assistance in dealing with
extremely difficult or unusual assignments
• Does superior work in all duties
• Extremely difficult or unusual
4.9 to 5.0 Outstanding assignments given with full confidence
the job will be thoroughly and
competently completed

MCI Course 8101 2-13 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2


Conduct Marks

Qualities When recommending conduct marks, the evaluator must consider these
qualities:

• Bearing
• Attitude
• Interest
• Reliability
• Courtesy
• Cooperation
• Obedience
• Adaptability
• Participation
• Physical fitness
• Moral fitness
• Influence on others

Evaluation For an honorable discharge, the Marine must display conduct marks
Marks averaging at least 4.0. Any mark below 4.0 not supported by documentation
of a court-martial or non-judicial punishment requires an entry in the
Administrative Remarks of the Service Record Book, page 11.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 2-14 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2


Conduct Marks, Continued

Standards The table below, guidelines from MCO P1070.12_ Individual Records
Administration Manual (IRAM), lists the recommended conduct marks and
their corresponding adjective ratings.

Corresponding
Mark Adjective Standard of Conduct
Rating
• Habitual offender
• Convicted by general, special, or more
than one summary court-martial
• Given a mark of “0” upon declaration of
0 to 1.9 Unacceptable
desertion
• Ordered to confinement pursuant to
sentence of court-martial
• Two or more punitive reductions in grade
• No special court-martial
• Not more than one summary court-
martial
2.0 to 2.9 Unsatisfactory
• Not more than one nonjudicial
punishment
• One punitive reduction in grade
• No court-martial
• Not more than one nonjudicial
punishment
• No favorable impressions of the qualities
listed on 2-14
• Failure to make satisfactory progress
3 to 3.9 Below average while assigned to weight control or
military appearance
• Conduct such as not to impair
appreciably one’s usefulness or the
efficiency of the command, but conduct
not sufficient to merit an honorable
discharge

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 2-15 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2


Conduct Marks, Continued

Standards,
continued

Corresponding Standard of Conduct


Mark Adjective
Rating
• No offenses
• No unfavorable impressions as to
attitude, interest, cooperation, obedience,
4 to 4.4 Average
after-effects of intemperance, courtesy
and consideration, and observance of
regulations
• No offenses
• Positive favorable impressions of the
4.5 to 4.8 Excellent qualities listed on 2-14
• Demonstrates reliability, good influence,
sobriety, obedience, and industry
• No offenses
• Exhibits to an outstanding degree the
qualities listed on 2-14
4.9 to 5.0 Outstanding • Observes spirit as well as letter of orders
and regulations
• Demonstrated positive effect on others
by example and persuasion

MCI Course 8101 2-16 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending


proficiency marks?

a. Timeliness and leadership


b. Physical fitness and leadership
c. Trustworthiness and participation
d. Bearing and mission accomplishment

Item 2 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending conduct
marks?

a. Influence on others and interest


b. Adaptability and know how
c. Cooperation and personal appearance
d. Individual character and leadership

Continued on next page

MCI course 8101 2-17 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 3 Scenario: Lance Corporal White handles routine matters acceptably, but in
your opinion, he has not performed to the best of his abilities. He gets the job
done; however, both you and the squad leader have often found it necessary
to supervise him closely when he is assigned a task, which is not routine.
You have encouraged him to take correspondence courses, but to date he has
not enrolled himself. Several times during the past 5 months, you have been
obliged to counsel him for leaving on liberty when his squad was not squared
away. He has received one valid letter of indebtedness from a local merchant
during this marking period. He keeps himself in good physical condition. Of
your three squad leaders, he is the least effective.

Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for


proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate?

a. Unsatisfactory and unsatisfactory


b. Below average and average
c. Below average and below average
d. Average and unsatisfactory

Item 4 Scenario: Corporal Black is a real “take-charge” individual. He readily


assumes responsibility and uses his authority wisely. He requires only a
general outline of what is to be accomplished, then goes out, and completes
the assigned task in an expeditious, efficient manner. You have relied heavily
on Corporal Black’s ability to instruct in general military subjects. Since
making corporal, he has taken two MCI courses, the Marine NCO and the
Marine Rifle Platoon. He completed both of these courses with high final
grades. His squad usually represents the best appearance and usually is the
best in the field, at inspections, and in drill. The members in his squad never
create disciplinary problems for you. He keeps himself at the peak of
physical condition and ensures that his squad does likewise. His personal
appearance and habits are above reproach.

Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for


proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate?

a. Excellent and average


b. Outstanding and outstanding
c. Average and average
d. Excellent and outstanding

Continued on next page

MCI course 8101 2-18 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 b 2-12
2 a 2-14
3 c 2-13,2-15
4 b 2-13,2-16

MCI course 8101 2-19 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI course 8101 2-20 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise


STUDY UNIT 3
EVALUATING PERSONAL AND FAMILY READINESS
Overview

Estimated 2 hours, 20 minutes


Study Time

Unit Scope This study unit is designed to give you an understanding of how to evaluate
personal and family readiness.

Learning After completing this study unit, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify actions to take to prepare a Marine and their spouse for a
deployment.

• Identify the actions a Marine and their spouse can take to maintain
readiness during a deployment.

• List helpful tips for a Marine returning from a deployment.

In This Study This study unit contains the following lessons:


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Predeployment 3-3
Lesson 2 During Deployment 3-35
Lesson 3 Return and Reunion 3-67

MCI Course 8101 3-1 Study Unit 3


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 3-2 Study Unit 3


LESSON 1
PREDEPLOYMENT
Introduction

Estimated 45 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the measures a Marine and their spouse should take to
prepare them before the Marine leaves for a deployment.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify family readiness.

• State where a Marine can go to obtain information about financial


planning.

• Identify the means in which a spouse can contact a Marine in an


emergency while away from their spouse.

• Identify who is responsible for a family care plan.

• Identify what type of legal planning a Marine should do before a


deployment.

• Identify the emotional factors that play in a deployment.

• Identify how children can be affected by a deployment.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-3 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Introduction, Continued

In this lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 3-3
Family Readiness 3-5
Financial Planning 3-6
Communication 3-11
Family Care Plan 3-16
Legal Planning 3-17
Emotional Planning 3-24
Myths of Deployment 3-26
Children and Deployment 3-27
Lesson 1 Exercise 3-31

MCI Course 8101 3-4 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Family Readiness

Definition Family readiness is defined as families who are prepared and equipped with
the skills and tools to successfully meet the challenges of the military
lifestyle. A successful deployment for the Marine and family requires
readiness through planning and advanced preparation.

Importance Similar to the unit making preparations for their deployment, many steps must
be taken by the Marine to ensure his/her family can continue efficiently
during his/her absence. Gathering information is but the first step. A
successful deployment requires good communication and an understanding of
the roles each family member will play during this time.

Support Many organizations are a part of the support structure available to the Marine
and family preparing for a deployment. The installation Marine Corps
Community Services (MCCS) can provide information, guidance, and support
during the preparation stage and for the family during the deployment. The
MCCS web site, (http://www.usmc-mccs.org) also displays information on
applicable support programs and links to other military support sites. The
unit Key Volunteer Network (KVN), Navy Marine Corps Relief Society
(NMCRS), and the American Red Cross are great resources for Marine
families as are the chaplain and his/her staff.

MCI Course 8101 3-5 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Financial Planning

Working out a The Marine and spouse should review family financial procedures and ensure
Plan all financial matters are resolved prior to departure. There should be a good
understanding of the roles and responsibilities of each spouse concerning
allocation of pay, payment of bills, and a household budget. The Financial
Specialist with your installation Marine Corps Community Services Personal
Services Financial Management Program, the Navy Marine Corps Relief
Society, and many credit unions and banks can provide assistance with budget
planning. Each unit has a command financial specialist. The Marine should
ensure the family has enough money each pay period for basic living
expenses such as rent, food, and utilities.

Direct Deposit Direct Deposit to a joint account can lead to confusion and problems if both
Distribution spouses are writing checks and making withdrawals on the same account.
Bounced checks and letters of indebtedness can result. Most banks will set up
separate accounts and distribute the direct deposit funds between the accounts
as requested. Transfer of funds between accounts can easily be made if one
person falls short of cash. Contact your bank or credit union for more
information regarding direct deposit.

Type “D” The Marine can initiate an allotment to family members to cover basic living
Allotment expenses. All or part of a Marine’s basic pay or BAH can be allotted.

Type “S” Savings allotment to a joint account can allow the spouse to draw out the
Allotment needed amount of money.

How to Only the Marine, not the spouse, can start, stop, or change an allotment.
Start/Stop an Should an allotment need to be changed, the Marine can change it through the
Allotment unit G-1 (S-1 or Admin Office) or via the E/MSS (Employee/Member Self
Service, website: http://emss.dfas.mil, phone: 1-877-363-3677 in CONUS).
The LES (Leave and Earnings Statement) can also be viewed on the E/MSS
website with a user p.i.n (personal identification number). It can take up to
45 days (three pay periods) for implementation of an allotment. Once the
Marine is deployed there can be a 60-day lag.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-6 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Financial Planning, Continued

Quantity of A Marine may allot part or all of his/her pay, with the exception of
Allotment COMRATS (commuted rations) and clothing allowance. When individuals
start an allotment, it is wise to have money set aside, particularly if allotting a
large amount of total pay. The money for an allotment is taken out of both
checks, the 1st and 15th of the month. The first allotment check is issued on
the first of the following month. If there is a pressing need for the funds
when an allotment is started or delayed, Navy Marine Corps Relief Society
(NMCRS) can often assist with an interest-free loan until the money arrives.
A Marine can sign a pre-authorization form at NMCRS to enable his/her
family members to receive assistance. If the family member is not pre-
authorized, permission via Red Cross message can be a long process. A
General Power of Attorney can also be used as authorization for assistance
from NMCRS.

Split Pay This option allows Marines enrolled in the direct deposit program to receive a
portion of their pay at their duty locality each payday. This requested split
pay amount must be a whole dollar amount less than or equal to the Marine’s
normal pay. The remainder of pay will be transmitted to the Marine’s
financial institution.

Family All deployed Marines with family members are eligible for Family Separation
Separation Allowance (FSA) $100.00 per month. This allowance will be reported on day
Allowance 31 of the deployment. It can take several paychecks before the money is
(FSA) received, but it will be dated back to include payment from the first day of
deployment to the end of deployment. There are reasons that can cause
termination of the allowance such as extended social or permanent visits of
family members.

Rations Basic Allowance for Subsistence (BAS) (sometimes referred to as


COMRATS or Pro/Sep Rations) is a continuous entitlement for all Marines.
Enlisted Marines will have deduction for meals taken from their pay account
when they are issued a meal card or being provided with meals, such as
MREs when in the field. The amount deducted is slightly less than the full
BAS for each day. As with FSA, it can take several pay periods for the initial
deduction to occur, but the full amount will be deducted at some point.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-7 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Financial Planning, Continued

Temporary All personnel will receive temporary additional duty pay while deployed for
Additional over 30 days or more than 50 miles away. The amount varies with rank and
Duty (TAD) deployment site.

Basic Basic Allowance for Housing (BAH) payment or stay in base housing will
Allowance for continue through the deployment.
Housing (BAH)

Additional Pay Other possible additions to pay are imminent danger pay, COLA (Cost of
Entitlements Living Allowance), flight deck duty pay, and sea pay. Specific pay issues
will be dependent upon the type, length, and location of the deployment.

Safeguarding Keep all important documents safeguarded from potential destruction of fire
or theft.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-8 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Financial Planning, Continued

Family Budget The following is a good form to use when finding your family budget.
Plan
MONTHLY EXPENSES
********(List here monthly expenses which are not paid by allotment)*********

PAYMENT FOR PAY TO 1ST PAYDAY 15TH PAYDAY

HOUSING _______________ $___________ $____________

FOOD _______________ $___________ $____________

ELECTRIC _______________ $___________ $____________


WATER _______________ $___________ $____________

CLOTHING _______________ $___________ $____________

GASOLINE _______________ $___________ $____________

TELEPHONE _______________ $___________ $____________

HOUSEHOLD _______________ $___________ $____________


SUPPLIES
SCHOOL SUPPLIES _____________ $___________ $____________
(LUNCHES, ETC.)

CAR LOAN (1) _______________ $___________ $____________


CAR LOAN (2) _______________ $___________ $____________

OTHER LOANS _______________ $___________ $____________


_______________ $___________ $____________
_______________ $___________ $____________

ENTERTAINMENT _____________ $___________ $____________

CREDIT CARDS _______________ $___________ $____________


_______________ $___________ $____________
_______________ $___________ $____________

POSTAGE/MAILING $___________ $____________

INSURANCE:
LIFE ________________________ $___________ $____________
HOMEOWNER’S _______________ $___________ $____________
VEHICLE _____________________ $___________ $____________

OTHER EXPENSES (SPECIFY)


___________________________ $____________ $____________
___________________________ $____________ $____________
___________________________ $____________ $____________

TOTAL EXPENSES NOT PAID BY ALLOTMENT $_____________ $___________

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-9 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Financial Planning, Continued

Family Budget ********(List here monthly expenses paid by allotment)***********


Plan, continued PAYMENT FOR PAY TO AMOUNT 1ST PAYDAY 15TH PAYDAY

ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________


ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________
ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________
ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________
ALLOTMENT FOR___________ $______________ $_____________

TOTAL EXPENSES PAID BY ALLOTMENT $______________ (+) $_____________

(=) $___________________

TOTAL EXPENSES NOT PAID BY ALLOTMENT $____________ (+) $__________


*(See previous page for amounts.)
(=) $___________________

TOTAL MONTHLY EXPENSES (=) $___________________


*(Add total expenses not paid by allotment with total expenses paid by allotment to arrive at total monthly expenses).

MONTHLY INCOME

SERVICE MEMBER’S BASE MONTHLY PAY $____________________

BASIC ALLOWANCE FOR SUBSISTENCE (BAS) (+) $____________________

BASIC ALLOWANCE FOR HOUSING (BAH) (+) $____________________

CLOTHING ALLOWANCE (+) $____________________

FAMILY SEPARATION ALLOWANCE (FSA) (+) $____________________

OTHER ALLOWANCE(S) (+) $____________________

TOTAL MONTHLY PAY/ALLOWANCES (+) $____________________

TOTAL MONTHLY DEDUCTIONS (ALLOTMENTS, ETC.) (-) $ ____________________

NET MONTHLY PAY (=) $___________________

SPOUSE'S MONTHLY PAY (+) $___________________

OTHER INCOME (+) $___________________

TOTAL MONTHLY FAMILY INCOME (=) $__________________

TOTAL MONTHLY EXPENSES (NON-ALLOTMENT) (-) $__________________

REMAINING (Net) MONTHLY FAMILY INCOME (=) $_________________

MCI Course 8101 3-10 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Communication

Emergency Family members can contact their Marines to inform them of family
emergencies (i.e., death, illness, or injury) through

• The Command via the Key Volunteer Network

• Local Red Cross Chapter or Station during normal working hours or at


the Chapter emergency number

• American Red Cross Armed Forces Emergency Services toll free in the
United States at 1-877-272-7337

• Duty Officer of the Installation or Officer of the Day

Casualty A Casualty Assistance Calls Officer (CACO) notifies the next of kin in the
event of serious injury, illness, or death of a Marine. A uniformed Marine
representative will make notification in person. In most cases a Chaplain will
accompany the CACO. This may not be possible in some cases such as in a
Marine Corps Reserve unit or when next of kin do not reside near an
installation.

Routine The Key Volunteer Network provides official communication within the unit.
Any official message will be passed via the Key Volunteer phone tree,
verbatim from the Commander, or his/her designee to each family. Official
messages may include schedules for return dates and port calls, changes in
those schedules, mishap reports, etc. All Marine Expeditionary Units
(MEUs) have official web sites accessible through http://www.usmc.mil;
some will have telephone numbers with automated update messages. Unit
family readiness personnel will provide details and information about these
services at the unit predeployment briefs.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-11 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Communication, Continued

Spouses The following is a form for the spouse to complete that will indicate her/his
Emergency preferences in the event of an emergency. This form should be kept with the
Data Sheet spouse.

EMERGENCY DATA FORM Today’s Date:

Your Name: Home Phone:


Address:
City, State, Zip:
Your Employer and Address:
Work phone: Work Days: Work Hours:
Volunteer organizations you work with, their phone numbers, and the days/hours you volunteer:

CHILDREN

Name: DOB: School:


Name: DOB: School:
Name: DOB: School:
Name: DOB: School:
Who is authorized to pick up your children?
Name: Phone:
Address:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-12 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Communication, Continued

Spouses
Emergency
Data Sheet,
continued

Do they have power of attorney if your child needs medical treatment? Yes: No:
Sitter’s Name: Phone:
Doctor’s Name: Phone:
Spouses Name / Rank:
Specific office / workplace: SSN:
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY INVOLVING YOUR SPOUSE

Name of a friend or relative you would like with you:


Name: Phone:
Name of clergyman you would like with you:
Do you want your parents notified? Yes: No: By Whom:
In order of preference, please list local friends you would like notified
Would you want these people notified personally? Yes: No:
Name #1: Phone:
Address:
Name #2: Phone:
Address:
Name #3 Phone:
Address:
In case of an emergency involving your spouse, please give us any information you think might be
relevant.

In order of preference, who should care for your children? (If name, address and phone number were
not listed earlier in the form, please include this information. Also, please indicate if these people
have power of attorney for medical treatment.)

Are these people aware you have given their names to care for your children? Yes: No:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-13 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Communication, Continued

Spouses
Emergency
Data Sheet,
continued

Do you have any pets that need to be cared for if Yes: No: Pet’s Name:
something were to happen to you or your spouse?
Please indicate who you would like to care for your pet.
Name: Phone:
Address: Any special instructions for feeding, walking, etc.
Is the pet on any medications? No: Yes: If yes, give details:
I give my permission allowing the Key Volunteer Coordinator or the Key Volunteer Advisor to
utilize this information should an emergency occur involving my spouse or involving myself when
my spouse is away.
Signature: Date:
YOUR PARENTS OR CLOSEST RELATIVE

Name #1: Relationship:


Address: Home Phone:
City, State, Zip: Work Phone:
Name #2: Relationship:
Address: Home Phone:
City, State, Zip: Work Phone:
SPOUSE’S PARENTS OR CLOSEST RELATIVE

Name #1: Relationship:


Address: Home phone:
City, State, Zip: Work phone:
Name #2: Relationship:
Address: Home phone:
City, State, Zip: Work phone:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-14 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Communication, Continued

Spouses
Emergency
Data Sheet,
continued

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Special needs, health problems involving you, your spouse or your children, allergies, pregnant, etc.

WRITE DIRECTIONS OR DRAW A DETAILED MAP

In the space provided below, give clear directions to your house so that we can find you in case of an
emergency.

MCI Course 8101 3-15 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Family Care Plan

Responsibility A Family Care Plan is the responsibility of Marines who are single parents;
dual military couples; Marines who otherwise bear sole responsibility for the
care of minor children; or Marines with family members who are unable to
care for themselves in the Marine’s absence.

Guidance A Family Care Plan provides guidance and procedures to the person(s) who
provide care for the Marine’s children, disabled, elderly, and/or other family
member(s) in the absence of the Marine due to military duty (training
exercises, temporary duty, deployments, etc.). The plan outlines the legal,
health care (medical and dental), logistical, educational, monetary, and
religious arrangements for the care of the Marine’s family member(s) or ward
to include Wills, Power(s) of Attorney, Certificates of Guardianship or
Escort, family contacts, Special Letters of Instruction, and any other
documentation reasonably necessary for the caregiver’s use.

In Absence of The plan must be sufficiently detailed and systematic to provide for a smooth,
Marine rapid transfer of responsibilities to the caregiver upon the absence of the
Marine. Marine Corps Order 1740.13B provides guidance for Family Care
Plans. The Plan must be reviewed for accuracy and validity each year and is
a part of the Marine’s service record. Family Care Plans for those Marines
who are required to have them are also included as a part of the unit family
readiness program.

MCI Course 8101 3-16 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Legal Planning

Available Services available at the Legal Assistance Office are free. They include, but
Services are not limited to, general estate planning, wills, insurance review and general
property matters. Advice is available on such matters as credit purchasing,
state and federal taxation, state motor vehicle laws, landlord-tenant
relationships, laws involving domestic issues (divorce, adoption, etc.), state
residency matters, immigration laws and commercial contract laws. Check
with your installation Legal Assistance Office for information specific to your
area.

Limitations The Marine lawyers cannot represent clients in civilian court, but they can
advise and assist active duty and retired service members that have personal
legal problems. The Legal Assistance Officer is required to treat all such
problems confidentially and may not lawfully be ordered to disclose such
information by any superior authority. When a legal problem is not within
the scope of the Legal Assistance Program, referral can be made to local
civilian counsel.

Action Act immediately when a legal issue is discovered. Immediate action will
often resolve small problems before they become more serious. For example,
the best time to ask questions is before signing a contract rather than when the
terms of the contract come into dispute. Never sign a blank contract!!
Utilization of Legal Assistance services is both advised and encouraged when
a legal problem is first identified.

Powers of One of the most important matters to consider during predeployment planning
Attorney is a Power of Attorney. A Legal Assistance officer should be contacted to
help you prepare one.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-17 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Legal Planning, Continued

General Power A General Power of Attorney allows the holder of that legal document the
of Attorney right to sell personal property and to use the grantor’s credit. A General
Power of Attorney grants virtually unlimited ability to act for another person.
General Powers of Attorney often create more difficulties than they cure and
are generally not advised. It is an extremely powerful legal instrument and
can be a dangerous instrument in the hands of someone inexperienced in
business matters, a person of unstable temperament, or a spouse when the
marriage relationship is in a state of discord. A General Power of Attorney
should not be executed unless the individual making it is fully aware of the
risks associated with such a document. Always consider whether a Special
Power of Attorney would serve the immediate purpose.

Special Power A Special Power of Attorney allows the holder of that legal document to act
of Attorney for the grantor only when conducting business that is delineated in the
document. This power of attorney will list in writing the actions you want
conducted on your behalf. A Special Power of Attorney can be very useful
for such matters as moving of household goods, settling insurance claims, and
managing financial accounts or funds not jointly held. Care should be taken
in determining who will hold the power of attorney and what actions will be
authorized in the document. Remember without the power of attorney, the
spouse at home could be significantly hampered in dealing with matters that
may arise during deployment

Wills This document is very important for every Marine, particularly those with
family members. The primary purpose of a will is to ensure that minor
children are cared for and property distributed as the writer desires. Without
a will, state laws decide how personal property is distributed and, if there are
children involved, they can become wards of the state. The state’s wishes
generally do not follow those of the deceased. It is important that an
individual’s will reflect his/her current state of affairs so keeping it up to date
is critical. Overlooking the execution of this important document could
directly affect the security of your family. Your banking institution or a
responsible adult should be named executor of your will. A will does not
cover life insurance distribution. Insurance is a separate contract between the
insured and the insurance company. Verify that your beneficiary designations
on insurance policies are accurate and current.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-18 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Legal Planning, Continued

In Loco This phrase means standing in place of parents. If children are in the care of
Parentis someone other than a parent or legal guardian, that person is considered in
“loco parentis.” Some states will appoint children as wards of the state when
the parents are injured and/or unconscious unless there is an original
notarized document authorizing a specific person to act as guardian. It is
possible that children in the care of someone other than the legal guardians or
parents will not be seen for medical emergencies without the original
notarized form. A separate form must be filled out and notarized for every
person caring for the child or children. For more information, DEERS
dependency information is available from the MCCS web site at
http://www.usmc-mccs.org/.

Notarization Notary public service is available at the Legal Assistance Office, most banks
and credit unions, and usually through Marine Corps Community Services.
There may be a small fee for the service depending upon where it is obtained.

Taxes Federal and state tax returns (when required) must be filed even though the
service member is deployed, unless an extension is granted. Problems in
preparing and submitting tax forms or improper tax assessment may be
directed to the Legal Assistance Office. Marine Corps installations will
normally have a VITA (Volunteer Income Tax Assistance) office to assist
with preparing a return. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) refund check
will generally require the signatures of both parties in a joint filed form.
Electronic filing will require payment via direct deposit to joint account. A
special power of attorney is recommended to facilitate filing and access to
refunds. The required filing time period for Federal income tax is between
January 1 and April 15 of the year following the taxable year.

Filing Taxes If you are outside the continental United States (CONUS) on April 15th you
Outside the have until June 15th to file provided you are on official orders, not on leave.
United States You can extend the June 15th filing date up two more months after your return
to CONUS if you file an IRS Form 4868 prior to June 15th. Detailed
information may be obtained from the IRS toll free at 1-800-829-1040.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-19 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Legal Planning, Continued

Record of The following sample will provide a gathering of all personal information that
Personal will be helpful during the deployment.
Affairs
RECORD OF PERSONAL AFFAIRS

LAST NAME, FIRST NAME, MIDDLE INITIAL


SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER
RANK, BRANCH OF SERVICE, ORGANIZATION/UNIT
COMPLETE LOCAL ADDRESS, TOWN, COUNTY, STATE, ZIP
COMPLETE PERMANENT ADDRESS, TOWN, COUNTY, STATE, ZIP

PERSONAL DATA
1. BIRTH:
(MONTH, DAY, YEAR, TOWN, COUNTY, AND STATE)

2. NATURALIZATION:

3. PARENTS: FATHER (NAME & ADDRESS)

MOTHER (NAME & ADDRESS)

4. MARRIAGE: WIFE:
HUSBAND:
WHERE & WHEN:

5. CHILDREN: FULL NAMES, PLACE, AND DATE OF BIRTH

6. PERSONAL LAWYERS OR TRUSTED FRIEND WHO MAY BE CONSULTED REGARDING MY


PERSONAL OR BUSINESS AFFAIRS

7. DEPENDENTS OTHER THAN SPOUSE AND CHILDREN

LOCATION OF FAMILY RECORDS


1. BIRTH CERTIFICATES:
WIFE:
HUSBAND:
CHILD:
CHILD:
CHILD:

2. NATURALIZATION PAPERS:
WIFE:
HUSBAND:
CHILD:
CHILD:
CHILD:

3. CERTIFICATES:
MARRIAGE:
DIVORCE PAPERS:
DEATH CERTIFICATES:
ADOPTION PAPERS:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-20 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Legal Planning, Continued

Record of MILITARY SERVICE PAPERS


Personal OTHER IMPORTANT PAPERS
Affairs, 1. WILL:
NAME: RESIDENT OF
continued WITNESSES:
EXECUTOR'S NAME:
SUBSTITUTE EXECUTOR:

2. POWER OF ATTORNEY:
AGENT:
INCOME TAX:
FEDERAL RETURNS:
STATE RETURNS:
CITY:
PERSONAL PROPERTY:

INSURANCE
1. LIFE:
INSURANCE CO: POLICY NO: PAYMENT AMT:
INSURANCE CO: POLICY NO: PAYMENT AMT:
INSURANCE CO: POLICY NO: PAYMENT AMT:

2. HOMEOWNERS/RENTERS/PROPERTY:
DEDUCTIBLES, EFFECTIVE DATES:

3. AUTO:
CITY/COUNTY/STATE REGISTRATION:
INSPECTION CERTIFICATES:
AUTO CLUB/TOWING SERVICE:

4. MEDICAL, LIABILITY, OR OTHER INSURANCE:

SOCIAL SECURITY
1. SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER:
HUSBAND: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT:
WIFE: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT:
CHILD: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT:
CHILD: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT:
CHILD: CARD/STUB LOCATED AT:

2. LOCATION OF UP-TO-DATE EMPLOYMENT RECORDS:

PROPERTY OWNERSHIP OR INTEREST HEREIN


1. REAL ESTATE HOLDINGS:
LOCATED:
THE PROPERTY IS ENCUMBERED BY A:
HELD BY:
TAXES PAID THROUGH (YEAR):

2. OTHER PERSONAL PROPERTY:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-21 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Legal Planning, Continued

Record of BANK ACCOUNTS


1. CHECKING:
Personal
Affairs, 2. SAVINGS:
continued 3. OTHER (SPECIFY):

SAFE DEPOSIT BOX


1. BANK/TRUST COMPANY:

2. LOCATED AT:

STOCKS BONDS & SECURITIES


1. LOCATED AT:

2. BENEFICIARY:

3. LIST OF WAR OR SAVINGS BONDS BY DENOMINATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS:

DESIGNATED BENEFICIARY

NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF PERSONS DESIGNATED ON SERVICEMAN'S OFFICIAL RECORD OF


EMERGENCY DATA FORM TO RECEIVE SETTLEMENT OF UNPAID EARNINGS AND ALLOWANCES IN
THE EVENT OF HIS DEATH:

DEBTS AND PAYMENTS


FOR EACH ITEM INCLUDE
• CREDIT AGENCY, STORE, OR BANK:
• AMOUNT DUE:
• DATE OF MONTHLY PAYMENT:

ENTER ANY ADDITIONAL DATA REGARDING INSURANCE, ALLOTMENTS, MILITARY


INSTRUCTIONS TO FAMILY MEMBERS, VETERANS ADMINISTRATION CLAIM NUMBER, ANY OT
NUMBER, ETC.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-22 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Legal Planning, Continued

Record of HOUSEHOLD: (NOTE WARRANTY INFORMATION ALSO)


1. APPLIANCES
Personal a. WASHER: MAKE: MODEL:
Affairs PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
continued b. DRYER: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
c. REFRIGERATOR: MAKE: MODEL:

PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:


IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
c. OTHER APPLIANCES: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
2. ELECTRONICS
a. TELEVISION: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
b. STEREO: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
c. COMPUTER: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
d. OTHER ELECTRONICS: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)

3. AUTOMOBILE(S) AND OTHER VEHICLES


a. VEHICLE #1: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE: WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
b. VEHICLE #2: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE: WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)
d. VEHICLE #3: MAKE: MODEL:
PURCHASED WHERE: WHEN:
IF SERVICING REQUIRED CALL: (NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE)

2. TROUBLE CALLS
a. PLUMBER: NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
b. ELECTRICIAN: NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
c. HEATING/AC: NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
d. MECHANIC NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:

MCI Course 8101 3-23 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Emotional Planning

Communication Often, family members don’t talk about deployments because the possibility
is the Key of separation makes them feel uncomfortable. Honest discussion is usually
the best way to deal with anxiety and minimize potential problems. Agree
how often you will write and what type of information will be shared.
Discuss alternate ways to communicate such as email, video and cassette
tapes, letters and phone calls. It is a good idea to plan in advance for length
and frequency of phone calls. Establishing a few ground rules and making a
list of the “need to know” items before a call will help to keep phone bills
under control. Plan ways to keep the connection with relatives and decide
who will write/send gifts to parents and other family members for special
occasions.

Varied Feelings Couples preparing for deployment and separation go through many emotions.
At first, they may feel excited. Later, they may start to withdraw from each
other in an attempt to deal with powerful feelings. After separation and
reunion, they may be disappointed that things did not go as they hoped.
Intense feelings are normal. Recognize your feelings and expectations and
talk to your partner about them.

Coping with Have special photos taken of you and your family together and of your spouse
Feelings or loved one alone. Give your special someone a keepsake for the
deployment that will act as an emotional tie to keep you connected when you
feel a since of loneliness. Be romantic before the deployment and create
special moments to cherish. Recognize that many couples argue right before
a deployment. Talking about your feelings ahead of time can help minimize
this.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-24 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Emotional Planning, Continued

Plan Ahead Try to anticipate what will happen after deployment and separation. Plan
how to handle practical problems. For example, decide what to do if the
furnace or car breaks down. Discuss how you want to share bad news. Try to
write about solutions and plans, not focusing on the problems. For the spouse
at home, once you find a comfortable routine, stay with it. Many people find
that routine and ritual can be comforting. Identify your support systems:

• Key Volunteer Network


• Family
• Friends
• Navy Marine Corps Relief Society
• Place of worship

Plan Special Discuss and plan how you will spend the day of departure as well as starting
Days homecoming plans that can be discussed and refined throughout the
separation. Indicate special events, birthdays, and school activities on a
calendar and duplicate so that each spouse has a copy. For special occasions,
cards can be purchased and flowers and gifts can be ordered in advance for
family members at home. Discuss special items the deploying spouse wants
and needs and develop a list of suggestions for care packages.

The Shock Be prepared for a shock. No matter how well you prepare for separation, no
matter how much you talk it through, when the day finally arrives, you will
still feel surprised that it is really happening.

MCI Course 8101 3-25 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Myths of Deployment

Deployment Many people assume that one “gets used to” separation, and therefore, each
deployment and separation is less difficult and hurtful. The first deployment
requires the greatest adaption because everything is new. The next several
deployments are somewhat easier because of lessons learned. However, if the
deployment cycle is frequent and continuous, families find that the effect is
cumulative and the strain is great. Knowing that there are others with the
same feelings and experiences during this time may make you feel less alone.

Return and After the service member returns home, you cannot pick up right where you
Reunion left off before the deployment. Each partner has been changed by the
experience and the physical, mental, financial, and emotional challenges they
have faced. A wife and husband are different after separation and must learn
to be flexible as they adapt to each other’s and the children’s growth.

Illnesses Some of your friends and even your doctor may think all of your illnesses
suffered during deployment are a figment of your imagination or due to your
spouse’s absence. Many spouses feel there is a tendency by doctors to
attribute very real pain or illness to the absence of the deployed partner. Their
suffering may be inaccurately diagnosed as childish attention-getting
behavior. Stress can bring on medical problems and it is important to have
those addressed.

MCI Course 8101 3-26 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Children and Deployment

Dealing with A deployment can be emotionally challenging for those left behind, especially
Deployment children. Although children’s reactions will vary with their personalities,
ages and coping skills, changes of the magnitude of a deployment will almost
always be puzzling to children.

Before Make sure children know they are loved unconditionally. Often young
Deployment children see themselves as the cause of separation. Make sure children know
this isn’t the case. Spend time with each child individually before leaving.
Suggestions for dealing with young children include:

• Be truthful, children can sense when they are being lied to.
• Let children know it’s Okay to talk about feelings, even negative ones.
• Tell children when you are leaving and how long you will be gone.
• If possible, give the children a tour of the place you’re going.
• Ensure that each child is left with a picture of the deploying parent.
• Visit your child’s school before deployment and talk with the teacher(s).

During Suggestions for dealing with your children while on deployment may include:
Deployment
• Maintain routines; regular mealtimes and bedtimes can help children
cope.
• Don’t let the separation mean a free rein, discipline consistently.
• Let children know they are making a valuable contribution by doing their
chores.
• Families find it helpful to mark days off a calendar till the return of a
Marine.
• Encourage each child to send their own letters and pictures to parent.
• Constantly talk about the deployed parent in daily conversations.
• Post a large world map and help the children track where the parent is.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-27 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Children and Deployment, Continued

Return and Suggestions for dealing with your children for the return of the deployed
Reunion Marine may include:

• Returning parents need to remember it’s hard for children to get use to
having them back around.
• Be patient; let your children know how much you love them.
• Be prepared for the adjustment period, for both parents towards the child.
• Returning parent should remember not to disturb a family set up.
• If there is a new baby that has arrived since the beginning of the
deployment, returning parents should introduce themselves slowly.

Infants (Birth- The following are some examples of what you may see for infants:
12 Months)
• Changes in eating and sleeping patterns
• May want to be held more
• May seem fussier than usual

Toddlers (Ages The following are some examples of what you may see for toddlers:
1 to 3 Years)
• Show regression in walking or potty training
• Cry for no apparent reason
• Whine and cling to you

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-28 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Children and Deployment, Continued

Pre- The following are some examples of what you may see for pre-school
School/Kinder- children:
garden Age
• Clinging to people or favorite toy/blanket
• Unexplained crying or tearfulness
• Increased acts of anger or frustration
• Sleep difficulties, nightmares, frequent waking
• Worry about the safety of everyone
• Loss of appetite
• Fear of new people or situations

School Age The following are some examples of what you may see for school age
children:

• Change in school performance


• Increase in complaints of headaches, stomachaches, or other illnesses
when nothing seems physically wrong
• More irritable or crabby
• Fascination with the military and news about it
• Worry about family and finances

Adolescents The following are some examples of what you may see for adolescents:

• Any of the aforementioned signs


• Acting out behaviors such as getting into trouble at school, at home, or
with the law
• Low self-esteem and self-criticism
• Misdirected anger
• Loss of interest in usual hobbies or activities

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-29 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Children and Deployment, Continued

Relationship Children who have a good relationship with parents usually cope well with
separation. They have an understanding of the parent’s job and why
deployment is an important part of it.

The Key Frequent and dependable communication between the deployed parent and
the family plays a key role in a child’s security and ability to cope with
separation. All children adjust differently to deployment.

MCI Course 8101 3-30 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 7 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 A family who is prepared and equipped with the skills and tools to
successfully meet the challenges of the military lifestyle is defined as

a. family preparedness.
b. family readiness.
c. Marine Corps values.
d. key family planning.

Item 2 Where should a Marine go to obtain information about financial planning?

a. The commanding officer


b. The Marines platoon sergeant
c. Many credit unions and banks
d. Any financial institution

Item 3 Which of the following is a means of contacting the Marine in an emergency


while they’re away on deployment?

a. Email
b. Letter mail
c. MARS
d. Local Red Cross Chapter

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-31 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 Who is responsible for a family care plan?

a. Individual Marine
b. Platoon sergeant
c. Platoon commander
d. Company commander

Item 5 What type of planning should a Marine do before a deployment?

a. Legal planning
b. Sensible planning
c. Corrective planning
d. Mandatory planning

Item 6 What is the key emotional factor when planning for a deployment?

a. Money problems
b. Communication
c. Shock
d. Loneliness

Item 7 What are some of the examples of how a pre-school child may be affected by
a parent being absent due to a deployment?

a. Misdirected anger
b. Worry about family and finances
c. Eating difficulties
d. Low self-esteem

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-32 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 b 3-5
2 c 3-6
3 d 3-11
4 a 3-16
5 a 3-17
6 d 3-24
7 c 3-29

MCI Course 8101 3-33 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 3-34 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise


LESSON 2
DURING DEPLOYMENT
Introduction

Estimated 45 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the principles involved in evaluating personal and
family readiness while a Marine is on deployment.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify tips in communication during a deployment.

• Identify the dental benefits you and your spouse have available.

• Identify key family organizations afforded to Marines and their spouses.

• Identify measures taken to ensure operational and personal security for


Marines and their spouses.

• Identify who is authorized to grant emergency leave for more than 60


days.

• State the documents required when traveling and taking leave overseas.

• Explain the general regulations dealing with government housing.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-35 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 3-35
Communication 3-37
Medical and Dental Tips 3-41
Key Family Organizations 3-46
Emergency Leave 3-53
Overseas Trip Planning 3-54
Government Housing 3-56
Lesson 2 Exercise 3-62

MCI Course 8101 3-36 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Communication Tips

Communication Communication during deployment takes many different forms. The greatest
morale builder during deployment is communication from home. Some ways
of communication are

• Sending letters
• Sending cassette tapes
• Making cards
• Sending “care” packages
• Sending email messages
• Making phone calls

Security As you communicate with home, it is crucial that you remember the
importance of operational security. Operational security consists of measures
taken to ensure that sensitive information is not compromised. Ensuring the
security of the unit and unit families depends on many factors such as:

• Deployment areas
• Deployment times
• Port call dates
• Special shore deployments

Note: Location of spouses and families during deployment, any special pre-
deployment training and the planned return date are also information
items that are sensitive. Avoid discussing operational information in
public places, over the telephone, or with members of the media.

Letters A great method of communication during deployment is letters. Long


distance telephone calls can get very expensive; however, letters can be re-
read during lonely moments or times when phone and email are not available.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-37 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Communication Tips, Continued

Rules for Here are some communication rules of thumb:


Letters
• Be informative and cheerful.

• Do not spread rumors.

• Do not brag to the other spouses about the number of letters you write or
receive.

• Avoid gossip!

• Be clear. Do not assume that one spouse knows what the other is talking
about. An earlier letter explaining details may not have been received.

• Try numbering your letters.

• For couples with young children: Let the kids record cassettes for their
deployed parent.

• Situations often change before a letter is received. It is strongly


suggested that you should not make a major decision or argue by mail.

• Avoid troubling your spouse with problems they cannot solve.

Email Using email can be an efficient way to communicate with your Marine
overseas. Again, number the email because dates aren’t always effective due
to time differences and how often your Marine is able to check his/her email.
If you don’t have a computer with Internet at home, you can access one at the
installation or community library, cyber cafés, and shopping malls. If you
have a USO (United Services Organization) close to where you live, they
normally provide free Internet services to military families in addition to
many other activities.

Email Security Remember operational security and never discuss operational details such as
ship’s position, command mission, or scheduling such as specific port call
dates.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-38 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Communication Tips, Continued

Pre-Read Read the contents before you send it. As you are reading, ask yourself some
questions:

• Is this negative and depressing?


• Does it contain personal matters that should not be read by others?
• Will my spouse or I be embarrassed if others read this?

Calling Cards A variety of telephone cards are available through many different sources.
Most phone companies issue cards and bill for charges monthly. Be sure to
research hours, rates, and service charges that will accrue when this card is
used.

Prepaid Calling Prepaid phone cards are based on the number of minutes. It is a good idea to
Cards research the rules of the card before purchasing it. There are many different
brands and denominations of cards and the expense may vary greatly. Be
sure to educate yourself about the rules of phone cards purchased at retail
outlets before you buy.

Military Occasionally Marine’s aboard ship or in port may be able to place a military
Affiliate Radio affiliate radio station (MARS) call home. These calls are made via amateur
Station radio to a receiving station in the United States and then via commercial
(MARS) Calls phone to your home. You are only charged the collect rate from the receiving
station (usually in California), but the call must be limited to 3 minutes.

Morale Calls During 1981 the Secretary of Defense authorized the military services to use
the AUTOVON (now Defense Switching Network/DSN) system at HQMC to
allow family members to contact servicemen who are deployed overseas in
remote areas. One family member per service member, a bona fide spouse,
child, or parent, is eligible to use this privilege for one overseas morale call
every 30 days using the DSN system.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-39 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Communication Tips, Continued

Morale Calls The morale calls are made through the Marine Corps Command Center
Information (MCCC) located at HQMC, Arlington, VA. Calls are restricted to two lines:
(703) 695-7366 or toll free at 1-866-HQMCNOW (1-866-476-2669). If a
morale call is received on any other line, the person calling is informed of the
correct number and directed to the proper DSN operator.

Long Distance Basic rates and hours for your local phone company will vary greatly. It is a
Rates good idea to research the different plans before deciding on one. Remember,
when comparing, take into consideration any monthly plan fees as well as per
minute rates. Compare rates for the original place of call as well as the
destination.

MCI Course 8101 3-40 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Medical and Dental

TRICARE TRICARE services and procedures differ based on the region in which you
are stationed. Correct enrollment in DEERS (Defense Enrollment Eligibility
Reporting System) is essential for all family members. Failure to enroll in the
DEERS system will result in a family member being denied use of support
services, including medical facilities.

TRICARE Enrollment is automatic when a family member applies for a new or


Enrollment replacement ID card. When children reach 10 years of age, they require their
own ID card. Tricare Prime automatically covers newborn children for 120
days. During this initial coverage period, the child must be enrolled through
the installation ID Card Center or the child will no longer be covered. In
addition, if children are to be born while your Marine is deployed, you must
have either a general or special power of attorney to enroll the child in
DEERS.

Dental Benefits The TRICARE Dental Program (TDP) is a voluntary dental plan available to
family members of all active duty and Active Guard/Reserve personnel. This
program offers comprehensive benefits with low premiums. It is available
worldwide. There are two levels of enrollment:

• Single coverage is for sponsors with only one eligible family member.

• Family coverage is for sponsors with more than one eligible family
member.

Enrollment Enrollment forms can be obtained by


Forms
• Calling United Concordia at 1-888-622-2256
• Visiting the United Concordia website at www.ucci.com
• Visiting your Tricare Service Center
• Visiting the local dental treatment facility

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-41 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Medical and Dental, Continued

Enrollment All new enrollees must submit a payment equal to one month’s premium with
Process their enrollment form. United Concordia will verify enrollment in DEERS
upon receipt of the form to confirm eligibility. Members should contact
United Concordia at 1-800-866-8499 inside CONUS, 1-888-418-0466 outside
CONUS, to verify that payment and enrollment form were received, verified,
and activated in the system before going to treatment.

Choosing a Choosing a United Concordia Participating Dentist will allow you to pay only
Dentist your cost share at the time of service. It will also save you money because
these dentists have agreed to the United Concordia allowances for covered
services. Choosing any licensed/authorized dentist is acceptable. Be aware
that the dentist may require full payment at time of service.

Dollar Figures Monthly Premiums:

• You pay 40% of the monthly fee. Your parent branch of service pays
60% of the monthly fee.

• Annual maximum is $1200 per member per contact year (Feb. 1st-Jan.
31st) for all services excluding orthodontics. Cost for some services such
as cleanings, fluoride treatments, and some exams and x-rays are not
applied to this annual maximum.

Orthodontics Lifetime orthodontic maximum is $1,500 per member, subject to age


limitation. Diagnostic services provide for orthodontic purposes are not
applied toward the $1,500 lifetime orthodontic maximum. Predeterminations
are free and are recommended for more complex, expensive procedures such
as crowns, bridges, or orthodontics. By having your dentist complete a
predetermation request, you can verify coverage for a specific procedure.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-42 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Medical and Dental, Continued

Vital Statistics The following Vital Statistics Record can assist you with gathering all of the
Record medical information that may be needed in an emergency.

MARINE
I. VITAL STATISTICS
Age: Height: Weight: Hair Color: Eye Color:
Distinguishing marks/Physical characteristics:

II. MEDICAL INFORMATION


Blood Type:
Vision in both eyes: Yes No
Must wear glasses/contact lenses: Yes No
If “yes” give details

Hearing in both ears: Yes No


Must wear hearing aid: Yes No
If “yes” give details

Regular Prescribed Medications Being Taken (if any)


Name: Dosage: Condition/Illness being treated:

Allergies (if any):


Adverse drug reactions (if any):

III. IMMUNIZATION INFORMATION


Type of Shot: Date Received: Dose:
Reaction/Remarks:

Any religious information or considerations, which would have a bearing on medical treatment:

Other Pertinent Medical Data:

Treating physician and contact phone:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-43 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Medical and Dental, Continued

Vital Statistics
Record for the SPOUSE
I. VITAL STATISTICS
Spouse Age: Height: Weight: Hair Color: Eye Color:
Distinguishing marks/Physical characteristics:

II. MEDICAL INFORMATION


Blood Type:
Vision in both eyes: Yes No
Must wear glasses/contact lenses: Yes No
If “yes” give details

Hearing in both ears: Yes No


Must wear hearing aid: Yes No
If “yes” give details

Regular Prescribed Medications Being Taken (if any)


Name: Dosage: Condition/Illness being treated:

Allergies (if any):


Adverse drug reactions (if any):

III. IMMUNIZATION INFORMATION


Type of Shot: Date Received: Dose:
Reaction/Remarks:

Any religious information or considerations, which would have a bearing on medical treatment:

Other Pertinent Medical Data:

Treating physician and contact phone:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-44 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Medical and Dental, Continued

Vital Statistics
Record for the CHILD
I. VITAL STATISTICS
Child Age: Height: Weight: Hair Color: Eye Color:
Distinguishing marks/Physical characteristics:

II. MEDICAL INFORMATION


Blood Type:
Vision in both eyes: Yes No
Must wear glasses/contact lenses: Yes No
If “yes” give details

Hearing in both ears: Yes No


Must wear hearing aid: Yes No
If “yes” give details

Regular Prescribed Medications Being Taken (if any)


Name: Dosage: Condition/Illness being treated:

Allergies (if any):


Adverse drug reactions (if any):

III. IMMUNIZATION INFORMATION


Type of Shot: Date Received: Dose:
Reaction/Remarks:

Any Religious information or considerations, which would have a bearing on medical treatment:

Other Pertinent Medical Data:

Treating physician and contact phone:

MCI Course 8101 3-45 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Key Family Organizations

Chaplain The Chaplain provides a friendly face, a listening ear, and can be a source of
support and reassurance while your spouse is deployed. The following
services are provided through the Chaplain Corps:

• Spiritual ministry
• Eucharistic Holy Communion-usually held at the installation chapel
• Baptism-included in Divine worship or may be held in a hospital
• Confessions-Protestant or Roman Catholic confession available
• Bible studies-conducted publicly, or private on-request
• Pastoral counseling-privately and in groups as the need arises
• Confirmation of wedding vows-as indicated and requested by individuals
• Funeral/Last Rites-as indicated and requested by individuals
• Secular ministry
• Counseling-appointments can be made by calling the Chaplain’s office
• Special ministry-in every life joy and sorrow simply happen

Navy Marine The Navy Marine Corps Relief Society (NMCRS) is a nonprofit charitable
Corps Relief organization. The local office provides financial, educational, and other
Society services for the active duty, retired military personnel, and their family
members. “Taking care of its own” is the society’s motto. The society relies
heavily on volunteer assistance rendered by family members of military
personnel. Financial assistance may take the form of a loan without interest,
an outright grant, or a combination of the two, depending upon the
circumstances and the repayment ability.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-46 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Key Family Organizations, Continued

Navy Marine The Navy Marine Corps Relief Society can


Corps Relief
Society’s • Help make a practical budget to avoid financial problems.
Abilities
• Provide financial aid for emergency or unexpected medical or dental
work.
• Provide financial aid if an allotment check fails to arrive on time.
• Provide financial aid in the event emergency travel is necessary.
• Help with funeral expenses (according to need) in the event of a death in
the immediate family.
• Provide layettes and assistance with baby needs as well as budgeting
assistance to handle new arrivals.
• Provide education assistance through a Student Loan Program.
• Assist with the cost of essential vehicle repair.
• Assist with financial needs in the case of a disaster.
• Operate the Thrift Shop on some installations.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-47 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Key Family Organizations, Continued

Services Not To ensure uniformity of treatment and fairness to all personnel, the society is
Provided by the not able to provide funds in situations such as the following:
Navy Marine
Corps Relief • Assisting service members to live beyond their means (normal income).
Society
• Financing business ventures or purchasing a home/car, or similar
permanent investments.
• Financing vacations, annual leave, or liberty.
• Paying debts contracted prior to entry into the service.
• Paying income or other taxes or interest on loans.
• Purchase of nonessentials.
• Payment of fines or legal expenses.
• Providing funds for marriage, divorce, or adoption.

Barrowing NMCRS cannot lend money to a spouse without permission from his/her
Money from Marine. If the spouse has a General Power of Attorney or a Pre-
the Navy Authorization Form, available at the NMCRS office, funds can be advanced
Marine Corps for the family’s need or emergency and the Marine notified after the
Relief Society assistance is given.

American Red The Red Cross offers communications assistance when the Marine and his
Cross family are unable to communicate directly or when a family cannot obtain
information. Military families often turn to Red Cross when there is a sudden
illness, death, or birth in the family. If you are away from your hometown,
the Red Cross can help you find out about these and other emergencies in
your family. If you are the patient, Red Cross workers in military hospitals
will write letters for you or help you arrange care for children. If an
emergency arises and you must contact your spouse overseas, the Red Cross
cooperates with service officials to get the message delivered.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-48 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Key Family Organizations, Continued

American Red American Red Cross (ARC) provides emergency financial assistance in the
Cross Financial event of disaster. Appropriate referrals between Navy Marine Corps Relief
Support Society (NMCRS) and Red Cross are made when necessary to give complete
consideration of needs. The Red Cross can provide financial assistance to the
NMCRS when there is no available NMCRS office. Local chapter contact
information can be obtained from the ARC web site (http://www.redcross.org),
or 1-877-272-7337 in the U.S.

Emergency If a Marine must take emergency leave, the Officer in Charge (OIC) may ask
Leave the Red Cross for an emergency leave report to verify the situation. The
information furnished by the doctor, lawyer, or other professionals involved is
then furnished to the OIC to assist him/her in making the leave decision. This
information is usually known as a Red Cross Message. However, the Red
Cross cannot approve, disapprove, or recommend emergency leave. A
Marine may also request this report before deciding whether the situation is
serious enough to take leave.

Marine Corps The Marine Corps Family Team Building (MCFTB) is a component of
Community MCCS at Marine Corps installations. The goal of MCFTB is building
Services competent, confident military families one at a time. The programs that are a
(MCCS) part of MCFTB are listed below and more information about them can be
obtained by contacting your local MCFTB office.

Lifestyle LINKS is a 9.5-hour spouse-to-spouse orientation class primarily intended for


Insights, spouses that are new to the Marine Corps lifestyle. It is designed to offer
Networking, Marine Corps lifestyle insights by providing an opportunity for networking
Knowledge and with other spouses who have traveled the road. The knowledge gained is a
Skills (LINKS) great way to equip yourself with skills that can make a positive difference in
your journey. All spouses are invited to attend no matter their experience
level. LINKS is available to spouses of USMC civilian employees as well as
other service members’ spouses serving with Marines.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-49 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Key Family Organizations, Continued

Key Volunteer The Commander’s program, KVN serves as a communication link between
Network (KVN) the unit and it’s families, assists in developing and maintaining a sense of
community within the Marine Corps unit, and is a reliable source of
information and referral. Each unit has its own KVN and training for Key
Volunteers is provided at the installation level by Marine Corps Community
Services. The unit Family Readiness Officer (FRO) and KV Coordinator are
the points of contact for your unit or your can contact the installation MCFTB
office for more information. Some examples of KVN responsibilities are as
follows:

• Welcome new arrivals.


• Pass official information from the Commanding Officer to families.
• Provide information and referrals when needed.

Spouses’ SLS is a ten-hour training offered annually at each Marine Corps installation.
Leadership SLS enables spouses to develop basic leadership skills and enhance existing
Seminar (SLS) skills. Attendees are military spouses who have demonstrated consistent
commitment to and involvement in family readiness and community building
programs. The seminar provides the spouses with the knowledge and skills to
enhance their effectiveness in leadership positions.

Prevention & PREP is designed to enhance marriages and engagements by reducing the
Relationship potential for personal problems. It is a research-based approach to teaching
Enhancement couples constructive problem-solving skills and strategies for building
Program commitment and teamwork within their relationship.
(PREP)

Chaplains CREDO is a program of spiritual growth retreats presented by the Chaplains


Religious to awaken Marines and their family members to the inherent personal and
Enrichment social strength available by living healthy spiritual lives. A variety of retreats
Development are available in CREDO in both secular and non-secular formats.
Operation
(CREDO)

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-50 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Key Family Organizations, Continued

Personal The Personal Services Division of MCCS is designed to assist the individual
Services Marine and the military family through centralized information/referral
services, relocation services, and the coordination of area human resources
services. The Division’s purpose is to assist in having information and
human services readily accessible and responsible to individual and family
needs.

Personal There are a wide variety of programs available through Marine Corps
Services Community Services including:
Programs
• New Parent Support Program (NPSP)
• Exceptional Family Member Program (EFMP)
• Information & Referral (I&R)
• Financial counseling
• Relocation Assistance Program (RAP)
• Volunteer programs
• Lifelong learning and off duty education
• Family member employment assistance program
• Career Resource Management Center (CRMC)
• Individual and family counseling
• Family advocacy
• Prevention & Intervention Services
• Children, youth, and teen programs including childcare and youth
activities.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-51 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Key Family Organizations, Continued

Marine Corps MCCS Semper Fit is the Marine Corps’ health promotion and recreation
Community program. It includes fitness and wellness programs as well as the following:
Services
Semper Fit • Recreation opportunities
• Information, tickets, and tours
• Single Marine Program
• Special events
• Aquatics Program
• Instrumental Program
• Physical fitness center
• Youth sports

MCI Course 8101 3-52 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Emergency Leave

Emergency If it is recognized that problems may arise that can be relieved or alleviated
Leave only by the presence of the Marine. Emergency leave may be authorized
whenever any of the following circumstances are determined or believed to
exist by granting authorities, and normally only after American Red Cross
verification is received by the Commanding Officer. Emergency leave may
be authorized for the following reasons for the following reasons:

• Leave granting authorities may grant emergency leave for any period.
When it will include excess leave or when the leave will result in a
negative advance leave balance greater then 45 days, leave granting
authorities may not authorize emergency leave for a period greater than
60 days without prior approval of the Commandant of the Marine Corps.

• Upon death of a member of the Marine’s or spouses immediate family;


i.e., father, mother, person(s) standing in loco parentis, son, daughter,
brother, sister, or any other living relative.

• When the return of the Marine will contribute to the welfare of a dying
member of the Marine or spouse’s immediate family.

• When due to any serious illness or injury of a member of the Marine’s or


spouse’s immediate family.

Loco Parentis In cases involving a status of loco parentis (meaning the Marine was raised
by someone other than a mother of father, i.e. grandmother, aunt, etc., that is
acting as parental unit). Such status normally should have existed for a
continuous period of at least one year prior to the Marine attaining 21 years of
age or one year prior to a Marine’s initial entry into the Marine Corps.
However, final determination of whether such a status did or did not exist is
with the leave granting authority.

Emergency Marines shall be authorized funded emergency leave travel in government


Leave Involving owned or controlled aircraft from overseas to CONUS (Continental U.S.),
Foreign Travel from CONUS to overseas, and between overseas areas. Government expense
shall be authorized for a space-required basis.

MCI Course 8101 3-53 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Overseas Trip Planning

Trip Planning Many times, during a Marine’s tenure with the Marine Corps, occasions arise
for spouses to join their husbands overseas while the unit is on deployment.
Several potential problems in regards to trips overseas can be easily avoided
with the proper planning and foreknowledge of information about air travel,
reservations, obtaining passports, visas, etc. If you are thinking about joining
your Marine during his deployment, start early! Some of the necessary
requirements for overseas travel take months to complete. When making
your travel arrangements, plan for the possibility that the Marine may not be
there when you arrive. Travel insurance and an alternate plan are always a
good safety net in case plans change.

Passports All family members planning to travel overseas must have a current passport.
Active duty personnel should consider carrying a passport. If you plan on
taking leave overseas, you may need a passport. Processing a passport takes
approximately 6 to 8 weeks once an application is made. Your unit’s S-2
would be the point of contacct

Loss of your If you should lose or you suspect that your passport is stolen, immediately
Passport report it to the nearest passport agency and also report it to the local police
department. To protect the integrity of the United States and the security of
the person carrying the passport that was lost or stolen, special precautions
are taken in processing lost or stolen passports cases. The main cause for the
loss or theft of a passport is carelessness. Exercise every possible precaution
to protect your passport since it is the most important document you can
possess. Guard it carefully.

Visas All family members (and active duty personnel on leave) will need a visa for
most countries they plan to visit. Your unit’s S-2 would be the point of
contact.

Vaccinations The International Health Regulations adopted by the World Health


Organization stipulate the vaccinations against smallpox, cholera, and yellow
fever may be required as a condition of entry into a country. Check with the
immunization clinic at your local healthcare facility for further information on
required vaccinations for each country you plan to visit. Any vaccination that
you have received must be recorded on your shot record and carried with you
when you travel. Be sure to take the kids vaccinations records if they are
traveling with you.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-54 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Overseas Trip Planning, Continued

Checklist for The following is a checklist for families visiting overseas:


Families
Visiting • Passport obtained
Overseas
• Airline tickets obtained
• Visas obtained
• Shots required for entering countries on your itinerary obtained (check
with your healthcare provider)

MCI Course 8101 3-55 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Government Housing

Continued If your family will continue residing on base housing during deployment, be
Residency sure you and your family are aware of all housing regulations. It is
recommended that before your departure, your spouse obtain a Power of
Attorney to act on your behalf in certain legal matters that may arise.

For the Family Remember to abide by all housing regulations. A family can be evicted from
government housing for proper cause even if the sponsor is deployed.

Temporary If the family will be away from base housing for a period longer than 15 days
Absence or more, but less than 30 days, it is required that a letter be submitted to the
housing manager. The letter should be sent to the Director of Family Housing
and should include the location of the family during the absence, reason for
absence, points of contact while absent, and who is designated to be
responsible for general maintenance during the absence (i.e. neighbor, friend,
etc) and their contact information.

Temporary If the family members need to be away from base housing longer than 30
Absence days, there is an additional requirement to submit an AA form requesting
Longer than 30 approval (specify length of time and reason for absence). If approved the
Days same contact information must be provided to the housing office that is
required for a standard temporary absence.

Waiting List Before being assigned to the waiting list, commands must ensure that Marines
are not in receipt of orders or expecting deployment. Those families that fall
into these categories will not be approved for family housing. If you are
unexpectedly subject to deployment and are awaiting family housing, you
must contact your housing manager and inform them of your specific
situation. For these cases the Housing Manager and the command will decide
the best course of action for the Marine and his or her family.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-56 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Government Housing, Continued

General Many Marine Corps bases have or are in the process of converting their
Information family housing into what has been termed Public Private Ventures (PPV).
This venture turns conventional family housing into a standard civilian
environment whereas base housing units are operated and maintained by a
civilian contractor. In many cases a different service provider will contract
each base housing section and the Marine will have to familiarize themselves
with the proper procedures for their specific location.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-57 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Government Housing, Continued

Family The following is a checklist that should be used when reviewing and
Checklist recording all important documents and articles from your personal lives, as
well as your home.

Indicate the location of the following documents or N/A if not applicable.

1. _______ Birth and marriage certificates.


2. _______ Naturalization or citizenship papers.
3. _______ Insurance policies (Life, Household, Auto).
Agent_________________ Telephone________________________
4. _______ Deeds, mortgages, lease agreements.
5. _______ Social security numbers: His___________________________
Hers___________________________
Children's______________________
_______________________
_______________________
6. ______ Military records (copies)
7. ______ Automobile title (or loan papers)
8. ______ Tax returns
9. ______ Divorce decrees
10. ______ Court orders pertaining to support and custody of your legal dependents
11. ______ Death certificates of deceased family members
12. ______ Bank accounts: (make sure spouse has full access to accounts)

Checking: Bank ______________________


Account Number ______________________
Telephone ______________________
Savings: Bank ______________________
Account Number ______________________
Telephone ______________________

13. ______ Savings bonds and securities


14. ______ Wills (husband and wife should each have one)
15. ______ Power of Attorney (General or Specific)
16. ______ Up to date ID card for all family members who need one
17. ______ Current Passports
18. ______ Legal papers/Adoption papers
19. ______ Executor appointment
20. ______ Does spouse know location of valuable documents?
21. ______ Medical Power of Attorney for children

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-58 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Government Housing, Continued

Family AUTOMOBILE
Checklist for
the Automobile 1. _______ Does it have a current base sticker?
2. _______ Does it have a current license plate?
3. _______ Do you have the title? Who holds the lien?
4. _______ Is the insurance paid up? When is the payment due?
5. ______ Has the car been serviced lately?
6. ______ Do you have an extra key?
7. ______ Do you know what type of oil to use? When should it be changed?
8. ______ Do you know what type of gasoline to use?
9. ______ Do you have the warranties?
10. ______ Do you now where to go for warranty repairs?
11. ______ Do you know whom to call in an automobile emergency?
12. ______ Do you have your automobile insurance agent's telephone number?
13. ______ Do you both have a current driver's license?
14. ______ Do you know what to do in case of an accident?
15. ______ If you do not have a car, who will help with transportation in an emergency?
______________________

CONDITION OF:

1. ______ Radiator and heater hoses


2. ______ Engine vacuum lines
3. ______ Fuel lines
4. ______ Brake linings, discs, pads
5. ______ Engine drive belts, fan, alternator
6. ______ Air filters
7. ______ Oil filters
8. ______ Battery cables
9. ______ Shock absorbers
10. ______ Tires (spare also)
11. ______ Seat belts
12. ______ Brake lines
13. ______ Radiator

FLUID LEVEL OF:

14. ______ Master brake cylinder


15. ______ Windshield washer
16. ______ Transmission
17. ______ Power steering pump reservoir
18. ______ Air pressure in all tires (including spares)
19. ______ Expansion tank
20. ______ Battery
21. ______ Engine oil
22. ______ Rear end lubricant

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-59 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Government Housing, Continued

Family AUTOMOBILE (Cont.)


Checklist for
MAKE SURE SPOUSE KNOWS:
the Automobile,
continued 23. ______ Location of spare bulbs/fuses
24. ______ How to check oil and other fluid levels in the car
25. ______ How to check tire pressure
26. ______ How to change a tire
27. ______ Location of spare keys
28. ______ Location of papers: (registration, title, insurance)
29. ______ Name and phone number of a reliable auto repair facility or towing service (e.g. Road
Rangers)
30. ______ How to change bulbs/fuses
31. ______ When and where to have the car serviced
32. ______ If tires must be replaced, what type, size, and what is a reasonable price

HOME:

1. ______ Is the house or apartment in good repair?


2. ______ Is the furnace cleaned and working properly? Clean filters?
3. ______ Is the hot water heater working properly? Is it operating at an energy saving temperature?
4. ______ Are all major appliances working properly?
5. ______ Do you know where the fuse box or circuit breaker is located and do you have extra fuses if
necessary?
6. ______ Location of water and gas shut off points?
7. ______ Are the switches labeled?
8. ______ Do you have your landlord's telephone number?
9. ______ Do you have a phone number for emergency maintenance?
10.______ Do you have telephone numbers for power and electric company, appliance repairman,
police, fire department, rescue squad, nearest medical facility, etc. near your phone?

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-60 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Government Housing, Continued

Family GOVERNMENT HOUSING


Checklist for
1. ______ Have you completed the Housing Application? Ensure that the housing office has
Government your current phone number and emergency number.
Housing 2. ______ Complete Spousal Acceptance Authorization so the spouse may accept quarters
while sponsor is deployed.
3. ______ Provide the Housing Office with a copy of your lease to ensure quarters will not
be offered until lease is about to end.
4. ______ If you are already in base housing, ensure family members are aware of all
housing regulations.
5. ______ If a family plans to be away from quarters, a request must be completed at the
Housing Office. Approved absences are usually no longer than 30 days;
extensions involving special circumstances are considered on a case-by-case
basis.
6. ______ Register guests at Housing Office; they may be approved on a 30 day basis up to
90 days. Special circumstances are considered on a case-by-case basis.
7. ______ If you experience overpayment of BAH after acceptance of Government
Quarters, do not spend it; it will be needed when disbursing records catch up with
your pay and the over-payment is taken back (all at once).
8. ______ If presently on the waiting list for assignment of quarters, but want to wait until
sponsor returns, ask housing to put you "on hold"; you will keep moving up on
the list. Quarters will be held for you and you will be given quarters upon
sponsor's return.

PERSONAL MATTERS:

1. _____ Are all dependents enrolled in DEERS?


2. _____ Do you understand the checking accounts and how to balance your account
periodically?
3. _____ Do you have an adequate dependent's allotment for your spouse?
4. _____ Do you have a back-up plan if the allotment is late?
5. _____ If you are pregnant, do you know who to contact in case of an emergency.
6. _____ If you are pregnant, have you made arrangements to have your other children
cared for when you deliver?
7. _____ Have you made arrangements for the care of your children in the event that
something should happen to you? Call Legal Assistance and ask about an "In
Loco Parentis" (a form used as a Power of Attorney where your children are
concerned).
8. _____ Do you know whom to call and where to go for medical emergencies?
9. _____ Do you have your spouse's mailing address and telegraphic address?
10. _____ Do you know what to do in case of an emergency and spouse needs to come
home? (call American Red Cross).
11. _____ Do you know where to go for legal assistance?
12. _____ Do you know where to go in the event of a financial emergency?
13. _____ Has your sponsor signed a loan Preauthorization Form at the NMCRS?
14. _____ Do you have the emergency telephone number of the military activity nearest
you? (They are in your civilian telephone book.)
15. _____ Do you know how to use TRICARE while you are traveling?
16. _____ If you don't have a car, have you asked people who will be willing to assist you?

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-61 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Government Housing, Continued

Family NEWLYWEDS
Checklist for
Newlyweds The military member of the family should do the following things to correct his/her records
immediately:

1. ______ Go to the Personnel Office with all official documents and change your official
records to show that you are married, listing your spouse as "Next of Kin" on your
Record of Emergency Data (RED).
2. ______ Check the Personnel Office to have your spouse listed as beneficiary for
government and civilian insurance policies.
3. ______ Apply for a Dependent's Identification and Privilege Card (Form DD 1172) and
enroll spouse in DEERS at your Personnel Office.
4. ______ Go to the Personnel Office and apply for BAH, COMRATS and start an adequate
dependent's allotment for your spouse.
5. ______ Check at the dispensary to have your spouse listed as Next of Kin in the event of
casualty. Be sure that your health record indicates your blood type, whether you are
Catholic, Protestant, Jewish, etc.
6. ______ Have your spouse attend a Relocation Welcome Aboard Brief.
7. ______ Make sure all bank accounts are joint. Most banks will not accept a General Power
of Attorney.
8. ______ Does your unit's Key Volunteer Coordinator have your new spouse's information?

MCI Course 8101 3-62 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 7 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Letters, email, calling cards, MARS calls, and morale calls are all examples
of ________________ during a deployment.

a. communication
b. being aware
c. staying up to date
d. ways of beating boredom

Item 2 What percentage does the Government pay for a Marine who volunteers for
the dental coverage?

a. 90%
b. 80%
c. 75%
d. 60%

Item 3 The Navy Marine Corps Relief Society, American Red Cross, and the
Chaplain Corps are just three examples of?

a. Services provided by Marine Corps community services


b. Services within the Key Volunteer Network
c. Key family organizations
d. Personal services

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-63 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 Who is authorized to approve emergency leave for more than 60 days?

a. The Officer in Charge


b. The Commandant of the Marine Corps
c. The Secretary of the Navy
d. The Platoon commander

Item 5 Which of the following documents are required for family members and
Marines if traveling and taking leave overseas?

a. Original orders
b. ID card
c. Birth certificate
d. Passport

Item 6 The Marine’s family can remain in base housing

a. only with written permission from the Commanding Officer.


b. for the entire duration of the Marine’s deployment.
c. if they pay 25% of the all amenities.
d. only if the Marine is deployed for less than 90 days.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-64 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 3-37
2 d 3-42
3 c 3-46
4 b 3-53
5 d 3-54
6 b 3-56

MCI Course 8101 3-65 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 3-66 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise


LESSON 3
RETURN AND REUNION
Introduction

Estimated 20 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the tips and lessons of a returning Marine both
personally and for the family from a deployment.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify changes when returning home from a deployment.

• Identify the ten commandments for homecoming for a married Marine.

• Identify helpful web links for personal and family readiness and
deployment preparedness.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 3-67
Homecoming 3-68
Ten Commandments 3-71
Helpful Web Links 3-72
Lesson 3 Exercise 3-73

MCI Course 8101 3-67 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3


Homecoming

Returning A Marine may have a picture in his/her mind about homecoming. The family
Home runs to meet him, showering him with love and affection, everything is
exactly as he left it when the ship pulled out. The spouse is the same, the kids
are the same, and the Marine’s role in the household is the same. All of that
is possible, but it’s highly unlikely. Things have changed in the absence of a
parent or partner. The spouse has taken on a new role and learned new skills.
Your friends may have made new friends. The kids have grown and home
repairs may have been completed in a way the Marine wouldn’t have done
them. There may be new furniture, new clothes, new haircuts, new toys and
new items on the menu. The best advice for everyone is to be flexible, be
prepared for change and be patient with the readjustment process.

What to Expect Expect face-to-face communication with your spouse or loved ones to feel
awkward at first. One thing you can count on is that things will not be the
same as when the Marine left, for either of you. Take the time to listen to
each other and acknowledge the great job you both have done communicating
during the deployment.

Review It is a good idea to take time and review the deployment. Discussing issues
such as preparedness, lessons learned, and any other areas of concern can help
build your relationship and coping skills for the next deployment. Some of
the questions to ask are

• How well were we prepared for the deployment?


• Did the frequency of communication (mail, care packages, phone calls)
meet the expectations of each?
• What were the successes and failures with the children?
• How can we improve the adjustment process on both ends of the
deployment?
• How did the financial setup work for each spouse?
• What should we do differently next time?

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-68 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3


Homecoming, Continued

Change of Don’t expect a “Change of Command” at the door. Transitions take time and
Command patience. The family members at home may be seeing the Marine’s return as
the solution to all problems. For the Marine, don’t expect to solve them all
within the first day of your return. During the deployment, the Marine was
either giving or receiving orders. The Marine needs to remember that his/her
spouse and kids will not respond well to demands and orders. Avoid the
“Who had it worse” game as the separation was difficult for both of you.

Reunion Reunion is a special time for everyone. Even though a parent’s long absence
may be a source of emotional strain for the children as well as the parent, it’s
possible to work together to rebuild that special relationship.

Opportunity With a little preparation you can make your homecoming a memorable
experience and an opportunity to improve your relationship with your loved
ones.

Family and The key to returning home from a deployment is to anticipate and prepare for
Friends changes. New routines were established while you were deployed, so
consider the following:

• Your spouse may be used to handling finances and other issues alone.
Communicate, be patient, and allow time for both of you to adjust.

• Anticipate changes in your social life; your friends may have found new
friends and new interests.

• Your children may turn away from you or have trouble talking to you.
Give them time to get used to being around you again.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-69 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3


Homecoming, Continued

Taking Care of While adjusting to family and friends, you’ll also need to address financial
Finances issues upon returning home:

• Contact your insurance company to reinstate coverage on stored vehicles.

• Review bank and investment accounts; revise your budget and portfolio
accordingly.

• Update or revoke your power of attorney. If your attorney-in-fact had


access to some of your accounts, reset your PIN and password.

• Update your personal profile with your accounts. If necessary, update


phone numbers, mailing address and military rank status.

Make time to talk with anyone affected by your deployment. Above all,
remember to be patient and give yourself and loved ones time to get
reacquainted.

MCI Course 8101 3-70 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3


Ten Commandments

Ten Hints of While the deployment soon will be a fading memory, the reality of our trip
What to Do and continues along with our anticipated homecoming. Our task is to get home
What Not to Do safely and begin preparing for our reunion with families and friends. The
following “Ten Commandments of Homecoming” may prove helpful in
reducing the return and reunion stress.

• Thou shalt expect your homecoming to be stressful. Stress is any


reaction to change. Even positive changes can produce stress in personal
relationships.

• Thou shalt enjoy being an invited guest in your own home. As difficult
as it may be, our spouses and children have managed without their
Marine or Sailor.

• Thou shalt not criticize your spouse upon your return. Chances are that
your spouse has done the very best job possible given the circumstances.

• Thou shalt change. Change in life is inevitable. It is a fact of life.

• Thou shalt spend quality time with your children. Children equate love
with time spent with them.

• Thou shalt not treat your spouse like a one-night stand. Both you and
your spouse have been looking forward to your reunion for a long time.
Treat your spouse with honesty, care, and respect.

• Thou shalt compromise your social activities for the first few weeks.
Your spouse may have met new friends who provided support during the
deployment and naturally wants you to meet them.

• Thou shalt watch your finances. The best liberty port is where your
family resides, making it tempting to go out and celebrate.

• Thou shalt confess to a chaplain and not to a spouse. While honesty is


always the best policy, timing and discretion are essential.

• Thou shalt give your time, talents and treasures to your family. Make a
conscientious effort to integrate available funds towards the needs of the
household.

MCI Course 8101 3-71 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3


Helpful Web Links

Web Links for The following are helpful web links for personal and family readiness and
Personal and deployment preparedness:
Family
Readiness • United States Marine Corps ( www.usmc.mil )
• Marine Corps Community Service (HQMC) ( www.usmc-mccs.org )
• LifeLines Service Network ( www.lifelines2000.org/home.asp,
www.lifelines2000.org/services/deployment/index.asp )
• The office of the Special Assistant to the Under Secretary of Defense
(Personnel and Readiness) (http://deploymentlink.osd.mil ,
http://deploymentlink.osd.mil/deploy/prep/pre_intro.shtml )
• Tricare military health care (http://www.tricare.osd.mil )
• United Servicemen’s Organization (www.uso.org )
• American Red Cross (www.redcross.org )

MCI Course 8101 3-72 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3


Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What should a Marine anticipate when returning home from deployment?

a. Changes
b. Over excitement
c. Very little changes
d. Financial hardship

Item 2 Which of the following is one of the ten commandments of a good


homecoming?

a. Thou shalt spend the extra deployment money on your family.


b. Thou shalt relax and let the spouse take care of all after deployment
expenses.
c. Thou shalt confess to a chaplain and not to a spouse.
d. Thou shalt confess to a spouse and not to a chaplain.

Item 3 What are some helpful web links for personal and family readiness and
deployment preparedness?

a. Yahoo, and Excite


b. Google, and Ask Jeeves
c. The United States Department of State, and The United States Department
of Justice
d. The United Servicemen Organizations, and The United States Marine
Corps

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 3-73 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 3-68
2 c 3-71
3 d 3-72

MCI Course 8101 3-74 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise


STUDY UNIT 4
ADVISING MARINES ON FINANCIAL PLANNING
Overview

Estimated 2 hours, 10 minutes


Study Time

Unit Scope The key to sound financial planning of personal finances depends on you
knowing your income and planning your expenditures accordingly. You
should establish a sound financial system according to your own particular
needs and circumstances. This study unit will give you the basic tools and the
confidence to plan your financial success.

Learning After completing this study unit, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify your current financial status.

• Identify your financial goals and establish a financial plan.

• Identify the tools that will help you to reach your financial goals.

In This Study This study unit contains the following lessons.


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Financial Status 4-3
Lesson 2 Establishing A Financial Plan 4-13
Lesson 3 Achieving Financial Goals 4-27

MCI Course 8101 4-1 Study Unit 4


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 4-2 Study Unit 4


LESSON 1
FINANCIAL STATUS
Introduction

Estimated 20 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope Regardless of age, gender, and ethnicity, you should establish a sound
financial system according to your particular needs and circumstances. This
lesson will teach you the fundamentals for determining your current financial
status and defining your budget limits.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify how a lender will compute debt-to-income ratio.

• List the basic elements to determine debt-to-income ratio.

• Identify the information necessary to set up a budget.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page


Introduction 4-3
Debt-to-Income Ratio 4-4
Setting-Up a Budget 4-7
Lesson 1 Exercise 4-11

MCI Course 8101 4-3 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Debt-to-Income Ratio

Definition One way a lender determines how much debt you can handle is to compute
your debt-to-income ratio. This involves measuring your current obligations
against your current income.

The industry standard is that no more than 37 percent of your income should
be required to meet your debt obligations.

Worksheet The following table is a debt-to-income ratio worksheet. Use the table to
determine your debt-to-income ratio. Fill in relevant data as it is gathered and
write in calculations and/or decisions directly on the sheet itself.

Step Action Calculation


1 Write in your current monthly gross income. $
2 Multiply the amount in step 1 by .37 (the industry standard x .37
for manageable debt).
3 Write the result of the calculation. This is the portion of $
monthly gross income available for debt payments.
4 Write in your monthly rent or mortgage payment. $
5 Write in your monthly car payment. $
6 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all $
installment loans.
7 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all credit $
cards.
8 Add steps 4 through 7 to get your total monthly payments. $
9 Write in 37% of your monthly gross (Step 3). $
10 Write in the answer from step 8 and subtract from step 9. $
11 Write the result here. This is the amount available for $
additional monthly debt payment.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-4 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Debt-to-Income Ratio, Continued

Worksheet The worksheet below is an example of what it would be like when it is filled
out.

Step Action Calculation


1 Write in your current monthly gross income. $4,205.00
2 Multiply the amount in step 1 by .37 (the industry standard x .37
for manageable debt).
3 Write the result of the calculation. This is the portion of $1,555.85
monthly gross income available for debt payments.
4 Write in your monthly rent or mortgage payment. $850.00
5 Write in your monthly car payment. $350.00
6 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all $120.00
installment loans.
7 Write in your total minimum monthly payments on all credit $35.00
cards.
8 Add steps 4 through 7 to get your total monthly payments. $1,355.00
9 Write in 37% of your monthly gross (Step 3). $1,555.85
10 Subtract the total monthly payments (Step 8). $1,355.00
11 Write the result here. This is the amount available for $200.85
additional monthly debt payment.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-5 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Debt-to-Income Ratio, Continued

Application Ask your lender how much your minimum monthly payment will be for the
supplemental loan you are considering.

If that amount is larger than the amount remaining at the end of Step 11, you
and your lender may have reason to be concerned about your ability to
manage the additional debt.

MCI Course 8101 4-6 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Setting Up a Budget

Definition A budget is a master plan for sound financial management. Your budget
helps you set goals for spending and saving your money. Budgeting actually
brings you face-to-face with reality and makes you think about alternatives in
spending.

Budget A budget worksheet lists three elements:


Worksheet
• Net income. List all monthly sources of income. Be sure you use your net
pay (income minus social security, taxes, etc.). Do not use gross pay.

• Fixed expenses. List those expenses that are the same or almost the same
every month. These expenses are rent, utilities, car payments, and
insurance, etc. Not paying these bills would cause legal problems.

• Variable expenses. List those expenses that vary from month-to-month.


Variable expenses allow you to make changes that will balance your
budget. Such expenses are food, clothing, travel, entertainment, etc.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-7 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Setting Up a Budget, Continued

Sample Budget Listed below is a sample budget worksheet.


Worksheet

Category Monetary Record Total


Net Income Record the total of all sources of income minus $
social security, taxes, etc. to get the total net
income.
Fixed Expenses Record the amount you spend each month on $ 1,096
each item. Add them together to get your total
monthly fixed expenses.
• Rent/mortgage $ 525
• Utilities
• Gas $ 34
• Electric $ 101
• Water $ 18
• Telephone $ 45
• Automobile payment $ 310
• Furniture/appliance $ 38
• Other (identify and list each Cable TV $ 25
separately)
Variable Expenses Record the amount you spend each week on $ 799
each item. Add everything together to get your
total monthly variable expenses.
Monthly
Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4
Total
• Food $ 75 $ 48 $ 43 $ 39 $ 205
• Auto expenses $ 21 $ 30 $ 29 $ 25 $ 105
• Clothing $ 49 $ 12 $ 21 $ 16 $ 98
• Necessities $ 28 $ 12 $ 37 $ 23 $ 100
• Entertainment $ 25 $ 10 $ 16 $ 40 $ 91
• Savings $ $ 100 $ $ 100 $ 200
• Other (identify and list each $ $ $ $ $
separately)

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-8 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Setting Up a Budget, Continued

Determining Use the following table to determine the percentage of income you are
Expenditure spending on each expense category. To compute the percentage, divide the
Percentage of amount you spend on that item by your net income.
Income

Monthly Expenditure Computation Percentage of Income


(Total amount spent
divided by net income)
Clothing
Food (Groceries and
eating out)
Housing
(Rent/mortgage, utilities,
telephone)
Medical
Savings/Investment
Transportation
(Automobile payment,
gas, maintenance)
Other

Expenditure The following expenditure table shows the average percentage of income that
Percentages Per should be spent for one person on each item.
Person

Expenditure Percentage of Income


Clothing 5%
Food 15%
Housing 30%
Medical 5%
Savings/Investment 5% to 10%
Transportation 15% to 20%
Other 15%

Comparison Compare the percentages you spend with the average percentages to see
where you might be overspending and where you can cut back to add to your
savings.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-9 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Setting Up a Budget, Continued

Accurate Part of planning your budget is to get realistic figures. The key to proper
Records budgeting is keeping complete and accurate records that considers all known
and foreseeable expenses.

You can identify your monthly expenses by keeping an accurate record of


your income and expenses for at least three consecutive months.

MCI Course 8101 4-10 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 How would a lender compute your debt-to-income ratio?

a. The lender would measure your current monthly expenditure against your
current percentage of income.
b. The lender would measure your current debt against your current credit
report.
c. The lender would measure your current obligations against your current
income.
d. The lender would measure your current fixed expenses against your
current variable expenses.

Item 2 Which of the following lists the three basic elements used to set up a budget?

a. Classification expenses, net income, and variable expenses


b. Fixed expenses, expenditures, and net income
c. Net income, fixed expenses, and variable expenses
d. Expenditures, taxes, and net income

Item 3 The key to proper budgeting is keeping

a. complete and accurate records.


b. percentages per person.
c. record of income.
d. debt-to-income ratio.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-11 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page


1 c 4-4
2 c 4-7
3 a 4-10

MCI Course 8101 4-12 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1 Exercise


LESSON 2
ESTABLISHING A FINANCIAL PLAN
Introduction

Estimated 45 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope A financial plan is like a road map. First you find out where you are. Then
you find the best way to get where you want to go. This lesson will teach you
to identify your financial goals and determine the role credit plays in your
financial status.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the three terms for financial goals.

• Match definitions of various credit terminology.

• Identify credit advantages.

• Identify credit disadvantages.

• List guidelines for using credit wisely.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 4-13
Financial Goals 4-14
Achieving Financial Goals 4-16
Definitions 4-18
Types of Credit 4-20
Using Credit 4-21
Lesson 2 Exercise 4-23

MCI Course 8101 4-13 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Financial Goals

Short-Term Short-term financial goals are the building blocks for attaining long-term
financial security. Short-term goals are the small steps taken that will
eventually lead you to the long-term objective.

Three critical short-term financial goals are to

• Obtain employment (get an income)


• Establish a budget (determine your expenses)
• Plan to save money (savings are key to financial planning)

Mid-Term Once you have obtained the three basic short-term goals (getting an income,
determining your expenses, and planning to save money), you can strive to
reach mid-term financial goals.

Mid-term financial goals include

• Saving for emergencies


• Taking a trip or vacation
• Purchasing major necessary items (a car, major appliance, etc.) or luxury or
unnecessary items (jewelry, new television, stereo, etc.)

In addition, mid-term goals are the means by which you strive to reach long-
term goals:

• Establish credit to enable you to purchase necessary items and manage


financial budget

• Invest to increase savings through stocks, mutual funds, and individual


retirement accounts

• Purchase insurance to prepare for emergencies and care for your loved ones
in the event of your death

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-14 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Financial Goals, Continued

Long-Term Long-term financial goals are things you hope to achieve. Some long-term
financial objectives are to

• Purchase a home
• Purchase a new car
• Establish a business
• Attend college (yourself or your children)
• Afford an active retirement

MCI Course 8101 4-15 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Achieving Financial Goals

Work Suppose your long-term objective was to buy a house. What steps would you
Backwards take to reach that goal? That is, what would be your short-term objectives?

One way to uncover these short-term goals is to work backwards. Thinking


backwards in terms of time, what do you need to consider? These become
your short-term goals. The table below is an example of working backward
from the long-term objective of buying a house to the short-term objective of
enrolling in courses or training.

Stage Description
1 You would need savings (a healthy bank account) to buy a house.
2 How would you get a healthy bank account?
3 You would have to get a steady job with a steady income.
4 How would you get a steady job with a steady income?
5 You would have to get education/training/certification/skills.
6 What is the first step toward getting qualified?
7 Take a realistic look at your abilities and background with a career
planner.
8 After you evaluated your abilities and background against careers,
what would be your next step?
9 Enroll in courses or training.

Plan You do not need a crystal ball to plan for your future. You must always be
guided by your plans and be prepared to adjust.

Take time to figure out the details as much as possible. Remember, whenever
you do not have enough money, extend your timeframe for obtaining a goal.

Commit Once you have made realistic plans, then commit yourself to fulfilling them.
Your decision is directly related to the degree of success that you will have
reaching your goals. Your commitment is the edge you need to succeed!

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-16 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Achieving Financial Goals, Continued

Reviewing Financial planning is an on-going process. You should review your income,
expenditures, short-, mid-, and long-term goals frequently.

Your life situation may affect your financial planning. Review your financial
plans when you experience a life-changing event such as

• Changing jobs
• Promotions
• Attending college
• Getting married
• Having a child
• Inheriting substantial items of value

Remember, your goals can be achieved if you plan, commit, review, and
adjust. However, without a financial plan, you are trusting luck to provide for
your future and success.

MCI Course 8101 4-17 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Definitions

Credit Credit means, "buy now pay later." Credit permits you to purchase goods or
services as you need them, but pay for them over time. Uses range from
credit card shopping to arranging loans from financial institutions for very
expensive items. Borrowing with credit is so popular in today's society that
many of us could not imagine a world without credit--a world in which we
would have to wait until we had saved the cash for such things as going to
school or buying furniture, automobiles, houses, or other items.

Our national and global economies are very dependent upon the availability
of credit to consumers. Lenders extend credit because, in return, they expect
the original loan amount plus a finance charge for the use of the money.

The amount of credit you can obtain depends on your net worth, your income,
and your credit rating.

Credit Line A credit line is the amount of credit a lender will extend to you. For example,
a new credit card may come with a credit line of $1,000.

Credit Rating Your credit rating or credit history is a summary of your bill-paying behavior
over a number of years. All creditors may submit bill-paying information to a
credit agency. The credit agency then produces a credit report.

Whenever you apply for credit, the lender can access your credit report. If
you are denied credit, you should be able to obtain a copy of the credit report
the lender saw.

You can pay to obtain a copy of your credit report from credit agencies. You
should periodically review your credit report to be sure the information is
accurate. If it is not, contact the credit agency immediately and provide the
information necessary to clear up discrepancies.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-18 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Definitions, Continued

Principle The principle is the original loan amount. Interest is calculated on the
principle.

Interest Interest is a charge for a financial loan, usually a percentage of the amount
loaned. When using credit to make a purchase, always add the interest costs
to determine the true cost of what you are purchasing.

Finance Charge The finance charge is usually expressed as interest. The finance charge is a
percentage of the original loan amount (the principle).

Annual The annual percentage rate (APR) indicates the actual cost of a loan per year.
Percentage It combines the interest charged and any fees.
Rate (APR)
When comparing the cost of loans, compare the annual percentage rate of
each loan.

MCI Course 8101 4-19 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Types of Credit

Installment Installment credit allows a buyer to pay for a purchased item in regular
installments, usually monthly payments. Since the goods purchased are used
as security for the loan, the seller owns the goods until all payments are made.

Open-End Open-end credit is when you promise to repay the full balance owed each
month so no finance charge is added. Of course, if you do not pay the bill in
full when it is due, you will suffer credit problems.

Some credit situations that are open-end credit are:

• Credit cards, such as American Express or Diner's Club


• Utility and telephone bills
• Medical bills

Revolving Revolving credit is a line of credit that may be used over and over again.
With a revolving credit agreement, you have the option of paying the balance
in full each month or making a minimum payment.

Although some loan institutions provide revolving credit accounts, the most
common form of revolving credit are credit cards such as:

• Visa
• MasterCard
• Most department store charge accounts

MCI Course 8101 4-20 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Using Credit

Advantages The advantages of using credit are, that credit

• Is convenient
• May be used to meet emergencies
• Helps you establish a credit rating
• Provides better service on a purchase
• Provides quicker receipt of an item
• Allows you to take advantage of bargains (Remember it is only a bargain if
you need the item and you do not pay more in interest than you save on the
item.).

Disadvantages The two main disadvantages to using credit are that you

• Pay extra in interest


• May make unnecessary purchases because it is so easy to use

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-21 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Using Credit, Continued

Guidelines If you decide to use credit, follow the guidelines in the table below to use it
wisely.

Guideline Action
Shop around Find the lowest interest rate.
Evaluate the purchase and pay cash • Consider paying cash.
• Delay the purchase; maybe the
investment is not really necessary
right now.
• Save up and purchase it when you
have the money to pay cash.
Be sure the purchase is a wise • Research to be sure your purchase
investment is a wise investment.

• Do not purchase items on credit


that will be outdated or worn out
before you finish paying for it.
Put as much down as you can The larger your down payment, the
lower your payments will be or the
fewer number of months you must
make payments, or both.
Set a monthly credit limit • Set monthly credit spending limits.

• Make sure the payment will fit into


your budget.
Reduce debt • Always try to reduce debt.

• Resist the temptation to keep


buying the most you can on credit!

• Try to pay off debt in advance and


then save the amount in your
budget allotted to credit payments.

MCI Course 8101 4-22 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 15 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete the following items. Check your answers against those listed at the
end of this lesson. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page
listed for each item.

Items 1 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of financial goal
Through 5 in column 2 that best identifies the financial transaction identified in column
1. You may use the answers in column 2 more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Financial Transaction Financial Goal

___ 1. Taking a trip or vacation a. Short-term


___ 2. Purchasing a home b. Mid-term
___ 3. Obtaining employment c. Long-term
___ 4. Establishing a budget
___ 5. Establishing a business

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-23 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Items 6 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the credit term in column
Through 9 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only
once.

Column 1 Column 2

Definition Credit Term

___ 6. Actual cost of a loan per a. Credit Line


year b. Principle
___ 7. Amount of credit a lender c. Annual Percentage Rate
will extend to you d. Credit
___ 8. The original loan amount e. Credit Rating
___ 9. Summary of your bill-
paying behavior over
several years

Item 10 What are two major disadvantages of using credit?

a. Paying extra in interest and make unnecessary purchases


b. Complicates your bookkeeping, and becomes easy to make mistakes in
computation
c. Is expensive to write a lot of checks and mail a lot of checks
d. Pay a higher interest and pay an additional charge for using credit

Item 11 What is an advantage of using credit?

a. Allows you to pay a high interest on your purchases


b. Helps you establish a credit rating
c. Helps you get more into financial debt
d. It can be used against you if payment is not made

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-24 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 12 Use the five credit guidelines listed below to answer the following question.

• Shop around.
• Evaluate the purchase and pay cash.
• Be sure the purchase is a wise investment.
• Put as much down as you can.
• Set a monthly credit .

What is the sixth guideline?

a. Reduce debt.
b. Consolidate your loans into one big loan with one credit payment per
month.
c. Use credit to save your cash and postpone paying.
d. Renegotiate new and longer terms for credit loans.

MCI Course 8101 4-25 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, continued

Answers The table below provides the correct answers to the exercise items. If you
have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page


1 b 4-14
2 c 4-15
3 a 4-14
4 a 4-14
5 c 4-15
6 c 4-19
7 a 4-18
8 b 4-18
9 e 4-18
10 a 4-21
11 b 4-21
12 a 4-22

MCI Course 8101 4-26 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise


LESSON 3
ACHIEVING FINANCIAL GOALS
Introduction

Estimated 30 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope Having a financial plan is essential, but a commitment to saving is the key to
your plan. A key part to successful saving is starting early. The earlier you
start, the bigger the payoff will be down the road.

The principle vehicle that actually takes you to your financial goal or
destination is saving. Savings enable you to achieve your personal financial
objectives and provide you and your family with a financial security blanket.

This lesson will teach you about some saving tools to help you reach your
financial goals. Specifically, this lesson will explain the uses of a savings
account, information about individual retirement accounts, and insurance you
can purchase to help provide financial security for your future.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Determine how to start a savings account.

• Identify the three types of individual retirement accounts (IRAs).

• Identify criteria for using an IRA.

• Identify the different types of life insurance.

• Identify the criteria for choosing the best life insurance policy.

• Identify the three methods to determine the amount of insurance needed.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-27 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 4-27
Selecting a Financial Institution 4-29
Open a Savings Account 4-30
Using Your Savings Account 4-31
Individual Retirement Account 4-32
Setting Up an IRA 4-34
IRA Withdrawals 4-36
Thrift Savings Plan 4-37
Insurance 4-40
Types of Insurance 4-41
Comparison Between Whole and Term Life Insurance 4-45
Choosing the Best Policy 4-46
Determining the Amount of Insurance You Need 4-47
Multiple Earnings Approach 4-48
Needs Approach 4-49
Needs Approach Worksheet 4-50
Common Sense Approach 4-58
Common Sense Approach Worksheet 4-59
Lesson 3 Exercise 4-61

MCI Course 8101 4-28 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Selecting a Financial Institution

Three Factors The first thing you must do to open a savings account is to select a bank.
to Consider Your decision on which bank to use should depend on the bank’s

• Location and service


• Interest rate
• Insurance as a financial institution

Location and Obviously, you will want to choose a bank that has
Service
• Branches that are convenient for you
• Functional services
• Evening and weekend hours
• Automated teller machines (ATMs)
• Loans
• Checking accounts
• Savings accounts
• Safety deposit boxes

Interest Rate An interest rate is the rate of money you get or the percentage amount the
bank pays you for keeping your money. You want to find a bank with the
highest interest rate. The higher your interest rates, the more money you
make on your saved money.

Financial Lastly, you want to choose a bank that is federally insured against losses that
Insurance may occur in a stock market crash. Financial institutions should tell you
whether they are insured or not. If they are insured, they usually have a limit
they are liable to pay. You also want to make sure the bank is federally
insured up to an amount higher than what you expect to save.

MCI Course 8101 4-29 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Open a Savings Account

Request Service Once you choose a bank, tell someone who works there that you want to open
a savings account.

Bank Form Once you tell the bank personnel you want to open a savings account, they
will ask you to fill out a savings account bank form that lists your

• Name
• Social security number
• Address

Sample Bank The table below is a sample bank form you may have to complete.
Form

Primary Applicant Information Secondary Applicant Information


Last Name, First Name, Middle Last Name, First Name, Middle
Initial Initial

Date of Birth Date of Birth


Home Address (Number and Street) Home Address (Number and Street)

City City
State State
Zip Code Zip Code
Home Phone Home Phone

Note: The secondary application information is filled out if you are opening
a joint account. A joint account means that a parent, spouse, or child
will share your account with you.

Minimum Once you complete the bank form, you will need to deposit a minimum
Deposit amount of money into your new account. Check with the bank personnel to
find out what your minimum deposit will be before you open the account.

MCI Course 8101 4-30 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Using Your Savings Account

Electronic Once you have established a savings account, a good way to use it wisely for
Deposit your financial planning is through an electronic deposit system.

This system allows the bank to automatically withhold a specified savings


allotment from your paycheck and deposit it into your savings account. You
can set up an electronic savings deposit in three ways:

• “A” (savings) allotment


• “B” (bond) allotment
• Direct deposit

“A” (Savings) If you decide to use an “A” (savings) allotment, a set amount of money will
Allotment be withheld from your paycheck at the mid-month and the beginning-of-the-
month paydays. This amount is automatically deposited to your savings
account at the end of the month.

“B” (Bond) If you decide to use a “B” (bond) allotment, you will purchase a U. S. savings
Allotment bond with the deduction from your paycheck.

The amounts and types of savings bond deduction plans are numerous.
Obtain information about them at your administrative or disbursing office or
from your savings bond representative.

Direct Deposit Direct deposit is the U.S. Treasury's name for an electronic funds transfer
system that transfers your salary directly to your checking and/or savings
accounts. The direct deposit system is fast and reliable because it uses the
Federal Reserve Distribution System.

With direct deposit, your paycheck goes directly into your bank account.

MCI Course 8101 4-31 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Individual Retirement Account

Definition Individual retirement accounts (IRAs) have been around since 1974. An IRA is
your investment in a retirement fund for yourself. Generally the money you
invest in an IRA is deducted from your taxable income (before taxes are
assessed). In addition, interest you earn on the IRA is deferred until you
withdraw funds from the account; that means you do not pay taxes on interest
you earn until you start collecting from the IRA.

Basic Types You can set up different kinds of IRAs with a variety of organizations:

• Through a traditional source


• Mutual fund
• Life insurance company
• Stock broker

• As part of a simplified employee pension (SEP)

• In a Roth IRA

Traditional The traditional IRA allows you to contribute and defer taxes on up to $3,000
IRA ($4,000 in 2004 and $5,000 in 2005) of earned income to a qualified retirement
account. To be deductible, contributions to traditional IRAs require

• Single taxpayers’ adjusted gross income not to exceed $33,000


• The combined adjusted gross income for married couples to be $53,000

Traditional IRA earnings accumulate on a tax-deferred basis. Minimum


distributions must be taken beginning at the age of 70 ½.

SEP A simplified employee pension (SEP) is a written arrangement (a plan) that


allows an employer who’s self-employed to contribute, without becoming
involved in more complex arrangements, to

• His or her own (if self-employed) retirement plans


• Employees’ retirement plans

Each participant under the SEP may establish his or her IRA accounts at the
institution of his or her choice. SEP contributions are limited to 15 percent of
compensation to a maximum of $24,000.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-32 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Individual Retirement Account, Continued

Roth IRA The Roth IRA, named after Senator Roth from Delaware, offers an attractive
alternative to the ordinary IRA. Roth IRAs are not eligible for SEPs.

You cannot deduct your contributions to a Roth IRA, but you receive all
qualified distributions tax-free. Under certain conditions, this factor could
work out to be a huge advantage for you. Contributions are post-tax and are
not tax-deductible, but earnings on the account are tax deductible and
accumulate tax-free.

Qualified withdrawals may be made tax-free with no annual limits. No


minimum distributions are required at 70 ½years of age.

A single person may open a Roth IRA with an adjusted gross income of up to
$110,000; for a married couple, up to $160,000 in the year of commencement.
Subsequent years have no income requirements.

MCI Course 8101 4-33 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Setting Up an IRA

Who is Eligible An individual who

• Earned income (a salary)


• Is under 70 ½years of age
• Wishes to defer or eliminate the payment of taxes on income funds set aside
for retirement

Creation An IRA account is created by

• A written document
• The trustee or custodian who must be a/an

• Bank
• Federally insured credit union
• Savings and loan association
• Entity approved by the IRS to act as trustee or custodian

Disclosure The disclosure statement given to you by the plan trustee or issuer (sometimes
Statement called the sponsor) must contain plain-language explanations of certain items
such as

• Information on when and how you can revoke the IRA


• The name, address, and telephone number of the person to receive the
notice cancellation

This explanation must appear at the beginning of the disclosure statement.

The sponsor of the traditional IRA you choose must give you a disclosure
statement about your arrangement at least 7 days before you set up your IRA.
However, the sponsor can give you the statement by the date you set up (or
purchase, if earlier) your IRA, if you are given at least 7 days from the date to
revoke the IRA.

If you revoke your IRA within the revocation period, the sponsor must return
the entire amount you paid.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-34 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Setting Up an IRA, Continued

Contributions Contributions must be deposited to the account either during the calendar year
or no later than April 15th of the following year. Such contributions may be
fully or partially deductible from a person’s taxes depending on their income
level and whether or not they are a participant under an employer-sponsored
plan. Distributions may be taken from age 59 ½years without penalty.

MCI Course 8101 4-35 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


IRA Withdrawals

Guidelines IRA withdrawal guidelines vary by type of IRA.

Traditional With traditional IRAs, withdrawals made prior to age 59 ½are subject to
IRAs income tax plus an additional 10-percent penalty unless an exception applies
for

• Permanent disability
• Death
• Substantially equal periodic payments

Roth IRAs Earnings from a Roth IRA may be withdrawn tax free if the Roth IRA has a
5-year holding period and one of the following criteria is met:

• Person withdrawing is age 59 ½


• Money is to purchase a first home ($10,000 lifetime cap)
• Person withdrawing is permanently disabled
• Owner dies

MCI Course 8101 4-36 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Thrift Savings Plan

What Is The The Thrift Savings Plan (TSP) is a retirement savings and investment plan
Thrift Savings that has been available to civilian employees of the Federal Government since
Plan (TSP) 1987. On October 30, 2000, President Clinton signed the Floyd D. Spence
National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2001. One provision of
the law extended participation in the TSP, which was originally only for
Federal civilian employees, to members of the uniformed services.
Uniformed service members were first able to enroll in the TSP during a
special open season from October 9, 2001 to January 31, 2002.

Purpose
The purpose of the TSP is to provide retirement income. It offers participants
the same type of savings and tax benefits that many private corporations offer
their employees under so-called 401(k) plans.
The TSP allows participants to save a portion of their pay in a special
retirement account administered by the Federal Retirement Thrift Investment
Board. The money that participants invest in the TSP generally comes from
pre-tax dollars and reduces their current taxable income. Members who serve
in a combat zone can also contribute from tax-exempt dollars. Such
contributions are tax-free when withdrawn; however, earnings on such
contributions are taxed when they are withdrawn.

Getting Started
While you are a member of the uniformed services, your service is your
primary TSP contact. Your service will provide you with TSP forms and
informational materials and answer your questions about the TSP. You will
submit the Election Form (TSP-U-1) to your service to enroll in the TSP.
(Your service may use an electronic version of the Election Form, e.g., on the
Employee/Member Self-Service System. Your service will advise you
regarding the availability of this method.)

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-37 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Thrift Savings Plan, Continued

How much May


In 2003, you can contribute up to 8 percent of the basic pay you earn each
I contribute?
month.

Note: Your contribution limit will increase by 1% in December of each year


until December 2005, when contributions will be limited only by the
elective deferral amount ($15,000 in 2006). You may also contribute
all or any whole percentage of any incentive or special pay (including
reenlistment or other bonuses) you receive. However, the total amount
you contribute each year cannot exceed the Internal Revenue Code's
elective deferral limit (26 U.S.C. 402(g)) for the year. Please refer to
the Defense Finance and Accounting System (DFAS) Web site at
www.dfas.gov or talk to your service TSP representative for
information about the uniformed services elements of pay.

If you are a member of the Ready Reserve or National Guard and have a
civilian TSP account, the total of all your contributions to all of your plans
cannot exceed the Internal Revenue Code's elective deferral limit. However,
if you also participate in a Section 457 plan, your contributions to the TSP are
not limited by any of your contributions to your section 457 plan.
In addition, if you contribute tax-exempt dollars from combat zone pay, your
contributions are subject to another Internal Revenue Code section (26 U.S.C.
415(c)) which limits your contributions to the TSP and other qualified plans
in 2002 to $40,000 or 100 percent of your compensation, whichever is less.
This includes pre-tax and tax-exempt contributions to the TSP for the year.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-38 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Thrift Savings Plan, Continued

Features of The
You can contribute up to 8 percent of your basic pay each pay period to your
TSP
TSP account as soon as you become a member of the uniformed service. If
you contribute to the TSP from your basic pay, you may also contribute from
one to 100 percent of any incentive pay or special pay (including bonus pay)
you receive, up to the limits established by the Internal Revenue Code.
The TSP also offers the following:
• Immediate member contributions
• Before-tax and tax deferred investment earnings
• Low administrative and investment expenses
• Transfers into the TSP from other qualified retirement plans
• A choice of five investment funds:
• Government Securities Investment (G) Fund
• Fixed Income Index Investment (F) Fund
• Common Stock Index Investment (C) Fund
• Small Capitalization Stock Index Investment (S) Fund
• International Stock Index Investment (I) Fund
• Interfund transfers
• Loans from your own contributions and attributable earnings while you are
in service
• In-service withdrawals for financial hardship or after you reach age 59 ½
• Portable benefits and a choice of withdrawal options after you separate
from service
• The ability to designate beneficiaries for your account balance
• Spouse’s rights protection for loans and withdrawals and recognition of
qualifying court orders
• A web site with general account information, capability for requesting
contribution allocations and interfund transfers, up-to-date TSP materials
and information, and calculators to estimate account growth and annuity
amounts
• An automated telephone service (the ThriftLine) for Plan and account
information and certain transactions

MCI Course 8101 4-39 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Insurance

Purpose Arranging for life insurance coverage now may seem unimportant. However,
think about those who rely on you financially. Your death would deprive
your family of your income, yet they would still have to pay rent, car
payments, credit card bills, and medical expenses. Life insurance provides
the financial cushion that allows your loved ones to adjust financially to life
without you.

Most people buy life insurance to provide financial protection for their
dependents in the event of their death. For those in the military, maintaining
adequate insurance is especially important. As a responsible, thoughtful
person, you will want to carefully provide for your family in the event of your
death, no matter how remote it may seem today.

Part of Most people jump into an insurance policy without having enough
Financial information about insurance. Learning as much as you can about the
Planning insurance will help you make appropriate choices when buying life insurance.
Your decision should be based on your life needs and circumstances.

In addition, you should reevaluate your insurance coverage as your


circumstances and needs change. As part of your financial planning, you
should review your insurance coverage and needs whenever you have a life
change such as

• Promotion
• Marriage
• Birth of child
• Death of family member
• College (yourself or a family member)
• Purchase of a home

Doing so will help you make appropriate choices when buying life insurance
and ensure you are financially stable for your specific circumstances.

MCI Course 8101 4-40 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Types of Insurance

Service Group All members of the uniformed services, including service adademy cadets are
Life Insurance automatically insured under Servicemember’s Group Life Insurance (SGLI)
(SGLI) for $250,000, unless they elect in writing to be covered for a lesser amount, or
not to be covered at all. Full-time coverage is also provided, under certain
conditions, for (1) persons who volunteer for assignment to the Ready
Reserve of a uniformed service, and (2) persons assigned to or who, upon
application, would be eligible for assignment to the Retired Reserve of a
uniformed service and have completed at least 20 years of satisfactory service
creditable for retirement purposes but have not begun receiving retired pay.

• Part-time coverage is provided, under certain conditions, to members of the


Reserves who do not qualify for full-time coverage.

• SGLI has no loan, cash, paid-up or extended values.

• SGLI is provided at no cost for 120 days following an individual’s


separation or retirement from active duty.

Dependent The Veteran’s Opportunities Act of 2001 extended life insurance coverage to
SGLI spouses and children of service members under the SGLI program effective
Insurance November 1, 2001.

Family coverage is available for the spouses and children of

• Active duty service members


• Members of the Ready Reserve of a uniformed service

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-41 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Types of Insurance, Continued

Veterans Veterans Group Life Insurance (VGLI) is a 5-year term insurance policy
Group Life available, upon application, to all members being separated or released from
Insurance active duty, active duty for training, initial active duty for training or upon
(VGLI) separation from the Ready Reserve. VGLI is renewable for life in 5-year term
periods and may be converted to a commercial insurance policy at any time.
VGLI may not be issued in an amount greater than the amount of SGLI
carried at the time of separation from service.

Members wishing to continue group coverage under the VGLI program must
submit application and payment of first premium within 120 days of
separation. If application (unless totally disabled) is not made within the 120-
day period, application may be made within 1 year after SGLI coverage
terminates provided evidence of good health is provided. If the member is
totally disabled on the date of separation, application for VGLI may be made
anytime during the one year extended SGLI coverage period. The effective
date of VGLI will be the day following the end of the 1-yar period or the day
following the date disability ends, whichever is earlier. Evidence of
continuing disability may be required in such cases.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-42 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Types of Insurance, Continued

Whole Life Your whole life policy provides the maximum amount of protection against
your death for an indefinite amount of time, throughout your "whole life."
For whole life insurance,

• Premiums remain at a fixed rate.

• The period between payments stays the same.

• The amount of insurance coverage for the entire lifespan of the policyholder
does not change no matter what happens to you.

• Companies also include a savings element called cash value. You may
borrow against the cash value of your policy.

Term Life Term life insurance provides protection for only a specific period of time
(number of years) at a certain cost. The face amount of the policy is only
payable if death occurs.

The two general types of term insurance are

• Level term - The amount of insurance coverage remains the same over each
renewal period; however, at the start of each renewal period, insurance cost
increases.

• Decreasing term - Provides a reduced amount of coverage for the same


premium cost each renewal.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-43 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Types of Insurance, Continued

Term or Whole The table below describes general types of life insurance policies that are
Life Insurance either term policies or combinations of term and whole life policies.
Combinations

Type Description
Universal • Cash reserves build from the amount you pay over the
premium. The increase can be borrowed against or paid
to the beneficiary.

• Policyholder can pay premiums at any time in any


amount (with limitations).

• Income tax is deferred until the cash is withdrawn.


Ordinary The policyholder usually pays the same premium
throughout the life of the policy (although sometimes
he/she can arrange to pay a specified amount for a
specified period of time).
Permanent • Covers whole life span.
• Premium can be borrowed with interest or paid to the
policyholder upon surrender of the policy.
Adjustment Policyholder can "adjust" coverage to meet his/her needs
by increasing or decreasing the premium amount or period
covered.
Variable What "varies" could be the amount of death benefit or
profits from the portion of the premium invested.
Annuity and Pay a lump sum or income to policyholder that lives to a
Endowments certain age or after a certain amount is paid (or pays a
beneficiary).

MCI Course 8101 4-44 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Comparison Between Whole and Term Life Insurance

Benefits of The comparison is easiest to understand when you first look at the way whole
Whole Life life works. When you buy a certain amount of whole life at a certain price,
there generally will be no change in the

• Amount of premium
• Period between payments
• Amount of insurance coverage you will have for the rest of your life

Disadvantages If you were to buy that same amount of coverage as term insurance, as you
of Term Life get older

• You would pay more for that coverage.


• The coverage would be for a shorter period.
• The insurance company could decide you are no longer eligible for their
coverage.

Decision Based Although term insurance looks great at the beginning because it is cheaper,
on Life’s you should now understand that whole life coverage has specific benefits too.
Situation Choosing which type of insurance to buy should be based on why you are
buying the insurance and on your financial goals.

MCI Course 8101 4-45 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Choosing the Best Policy

Read Before buying insurance, read the policy and understand the coverage you are
buying.

Know Your Make sure your insurance company is licensed with the state. If it is, the
Insurance insurance commission can be helpful if a misunderstanding or dispute occurs
Rights between you and the insurance company.

Insurance professionals can give you general guidelines about your rights
when buying insurance. You can cancel or lapse a policy at any time, but you
must pay the premium for the time the policy was in force.

If your insurance company collects personal information about you, ask how
it will be used. If your insurance company has incorrect information about
you in their files that resulted in your being turned down for insurance, make
sure it is corrected.

Know the Insurance companies are rated by independent rating services, such as Best's
Insurance Insurance Reports (available in most libraries).
Company’s
Rating A rating of "A" or better (A+ or A++) indicates financial stability and that the
company is good on paying claims. Your insurance broker or state insurance
commissioner can give you the rating. Use "A-rated" companies only!

Evaluate Your The amount of insurance you need depends on how old you are, your
Needs situation, marital status, number of dependents, income, etc. Purchase
insurance that meets your needs and financial plan.

Read Free "What You Should Know About Life Insurance" is a free publication
Government available quarterly. You can obtain a copy by contacting Consumer
Information Information Center, Pueblo, CO 81009.

MCI Course 8101 4-46 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Determining the Amount of Insurance You Need

Three Methods Picking a life insurance policy is a multifaceted problem. Because many
factors are involved in projecting the future economy (like inflation and
recession) and your future employment, no single, fixed formula exists to
determine the amount of life insurance a person should have.

The three approaches to determining the amount of insurance you need to


purchase are

• Multiple earnings
• Needs
• Common sense

MCI Course 8101 4-47 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Multiple Earnings Approach

Definition Under the multiple earnings model, the required amount of life insurance is a
direct function of the insured’s annual income.

One version of this approach multiplies current earnings by a factor of 5 times


12 months and increases that amount by the value of the unpaid home
mortgage plus $50,000 for each child living at home.

Example A member with a spouse, two children in high school, and $125,000
Procedure outstanding mortgage has a monthly gross income (base pay plus basic
allowance for housing [BAH]) of $5,100.

Using the multiple earnings approach described above, the amount of


insurance this member should purchase is

1. Salary multiplied by 5: $ 5,100 x 5 = $ 25,500


2. Result of step 1 multiplied by 12 months: $ 25,500 x 12 = $ 306,000
3. Add outstanding mortgage balance: $ 306,000 + $ 125,000 = $ 431,000
4. Multiply number of children at home by $50, 000: $50,000 x 2 = $
100,000
5. Add results of step 3 and 4 together to get total insurance requirement:
$ 431,000 + $ 100,000 = $ 531,000

The amount of insurance this member should purchase is $ 531,000.

MCI Course 8101 4-48 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach

Definition This technique of estimating insurance requirements examines the financial


situation of the insured and considers other resources that may be available.
While it takes more effort than the multiple earnings method, it produces an
estimate specifically tailored to an individual's situation.

Eight Steps The table below list the eight steps for the needs approach.

Step Action
1 Determine amount of income available to survivors when you die.
2 Determine amount of expenses that must be paid (not continuing
financial needs) upon your death.
3 Subtract amount of expenses from step 2 from the amount of income
from step 1. If the amount of expenses is

• Less than the income, the difference results in excess income


available to survivors.
• Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and
should be placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount
4 Identify family insurance policies currently purchased by

• Policy number
• Type of insurance
• Name of insurance company
• Beneficiary
• Face value
5 Determine family’s projected monthly income from all sources.
6 Determine family’s projected monthly expenses (continuing financial
needs) for all items.
7 Subtract the amount of expenses from step 5 from the amount of
income from step 6. If the amount of expenses is

• Less than the income, the difference results in excess income


available to survivors.
• Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and
should be placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount.
8 Determine the amount (if any) of insurance you need to make up for
any shortages.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-49 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet

Step 1 Determine amount of income available to survivors when you die. Add all
sources together.

Source of Income Amount


Military Death Gratuity Pay
Back Pay and Allowances
VA Death Benefit Payment
Social Security Death Benefit
Proceeds of SGLI/VGLI Insurance
Policy Number
Policy Number
Other Sources of Income (Explain)
From
From
From
From
Total Income Available to Survivors

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-50 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued

Step 2 Determine amount of expenses that must be paid (not continuing financial
needs) upon your death. Add all expenses together.

Reason for Expense Amount


Executor’s Fund (count on $ 5,000)
Home Mortgage Payoff (1st mortgage)
Home Mortgage Payoff (2nd mortgage)
Funeral Expenses (count on $ 5,000)
Emergency Expenses (count on $ 5,000)
Automobile Loans to be Paid Off
1st vehicle
2nd vehicle
3rd vehicle
Other Loans to be Paid Off (Explain)
For
For
For
For
Other Expenses (Explain)
For
For
For
Total Expenses Upon Your Death

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-51 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued

Step 3 Subtract amount of expenses from step 2 from the amount of income from
step 1. If the amount of expenses is

• Less than the income, the difference results in excess income available to
survivors.

• Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and should be
placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount.

Step Result Amount


Amount of Income from Step 1
Amount of Expenses from Step 2
Difference (Excess Income or Shortage)

Notes: If the difference in step 3 indicates that your family’s income is


enough to cover the immediate expenses they will face, your first
concern about their financial well-being is satisfied. But, remember,
this only covers their immediate expenses; it does not provide for a
continued source of income for their day-to-day, month-to-month
living expenses. These living expenses are the next greatest concern
you will face.

If the difference in step 3 shows that your survivors will not have
enough immediate cash available to cover their expenses, they will be
in deep trouble. You need to take immediate action to ensure their
financial security. Remember, insurance benefits only cover a source
of immediate funds. Other investments (stocks, mutual funds, IRAs,
etc.) may be a source of ongoing income.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-52 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued

Step 4 Identify family insurance policies currently purchased by

• Policy number
• Type of insurance
• Name of insurance company
• Beneficiary
• Face value

Policy Type of Name of Beneficiary Face Value


Number Insurance Insurance
Company

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-53 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued

Step 5 Determine family’s projected monthly income from all sources. Add all
amounts together.

Source Amount
Surviving Spouse’s Salary
Survivor Benefit Plan Payments
Dependency and Indemnity Compensation
Payments
VA Pension
VA Benefits (Explain)
For Spouse
For Children
For Parents
Social Security Benefits (Explain)
For Spouse
For Children
For Parents
Other Income (Explain)
For
For
For
Total Monthly Income for Family

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-54 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued

Step 6 Determine family’s projected monthly expenses (continuing financial needs)


for all items. Add all monthly expenses together.

Reason for Expense Amount


Rent or Mortgage Payment
Utilities
Electricity
Gas
Water
Telephone
Cable Television
Food
Clothing
Entertainment
Transportation
Loan Payments (Explain)
For
For
For
Other Expenses (Explain)
For
For
For
Total Monthly Living Expenses

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-55 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued

Step 7 Subtract the amount of expenses from step 5 from the amount of income from
step 6. If the amount of expenses is

• Less than the income, the difference results in excess income available to
survivors.

• Greater than the income, the difference results in a shortage and should be
placed in brackets to indicate the shortage amount.

Step Result Amount


Amount of Income from Step 6
Amount of Expenses from Step 5
Difference (Excess Income or Shortage)

Notes: If the difference in step 7 indicates that your family’s monthly income
after your death is enough to cover their anticipated monthly expenses, your
immediate concern regarding their financial security should be at ease.

Although it appears they will be provided for, they should have an


income “cushion” to guard against emergencies, inflation, disasters,
and the death of other family members.

On the other hand, if the difference in step 7 indicates that your


survivors will not have enough monthly income to cover their
expenses, you should take immediate action to preclude them from
experiencing major financial difficulties. The quickest and least
expensive action you can take is to immediately increase your life
insurance. Little can be done to protect your family after you are
gone, and you could be “gone” tomorrow.

Other steps you can take now to protect your family are to invest in
relatively safe stocks, mutual funds, or IRAs and to save, save, and
save some more.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-56 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Needs Approach Worksheet, Continued

Step 8 Determine the amount (if any) of insurance you need to make up for any
shortages.

After you have completed the computations in the previous seven steps, you
might find yourself fortunate enough to have sufficient insurance to satisfy
your present financial needs as well as the needs of your survivors after you
are gone.

By the same token, you may have determined that the amount of life
insurance protection you are presently carrying will be insufficient to provide
your family with the financial protection they will need and deserve.

As your income level increases, and you are able to place more money into
sound investments that provide the financial security you seek, your insurance
needs may decline. But until you reach that “safety net,” it is better to be safe
than sorry.

MCI Course 8101 4-57 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Common Sense Approach

Definition The common sense approach calculates the future financial expenses of your
family (like car, house, and education) to determine the amount of life
insurance you need.

Procedure In the common sense approach, you

• Determine your family’s financial need

• Immediate expenses
• Long-term expenses

• Determine your family’s financial assets

• Determine the life insurance needed by subtracting the total assets from the
total needs

MCI Course 8101 4-58 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Common Sense Approach Worksheet

Needs List the reason for immediate and long-term expenses and each cost. Add the
amount of expenses together to determine your family’s financial needs.

Reason for Expense Amount


Immediate Expenses
Funeral Expenses
Uninsured Medical Expenses
Estate Settlement Expenses
Long-Term Expenses
Emergency Fund
Repayment of Debts
Family Living Expenses
Homemaking Expenses (child care, house and
lawn care, etc.)
Education Fund
Retirement Fund
All Other Expenses
Total Needs

Assets To determine your family’s financial assets, list the source and amount of all
income. Add all income together.

Source of Income Amount


Current Life Insurance (All policies)
All Pension Benefits
Cash and Savings
Equity in Real Estate (If it were to be sold)
All Investments (Stocks, bonds, mutual funds,
IRAs, Keogh plans, etc.)
Social Security Survivor Benefits
(Monthly amount times Number of months)
All Other Income
Total Assets

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-59 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Common Sense Approach Worksheet, Continued

Insurance Subtract the total assets from the total needs to determine the amount of
Required insurance you need. The result would be the amount of insurance you need.

Insurance Calculation Amount


Total Needs
Total Assets
Life Insurance Needed

MCI Course 8101 4-60 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3


Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete the following items. Check your answers against those listed at the
end of this lesson. If you have any questions, refer to the reference page
listed for each item.

Item 1 What are the three factors to consider when choosing a financial institution to
start a savings account?

a. Bank’s location, interest rate, and insurance


b. Credit card interest rates, bank location, or time attendance
c. Shop around, credit ratings, or interest rates
d. Credit line, interest rates, or credit ratings

Item 2 What are the three different kinds of IRAs?

a. Roth, trustee, and SEP


b. Traditional, Roth, and individual
c. Tax free, withdrawals, and rollovers
d. SEP, traditional, and Roth

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-61 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 3 Under what age are you eligible to set up an IRA?

a. 21
b. 45
c. 59 ½
d. 70 ½

Item 4 The minimum age at which you can draw funds from your IRA without
penalty is

a. 21
b. 45
c. 59 ½
d. 70 ½

Items 5 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of insurance
Through 8 from column 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in
column 2 only once.

Column 1 Column 2

Definition Type of Insurance

___ 5. Cash reserves build from a. Whole life


amount you pay over the b. Term life
premium and can be c. Ordinary
borrowed against d. Universal
___ 6. Provides protection for a e. Permanent
specified period of time at a
certain cost
___ 7. Covers whole life span and
premium can be borrowed
with interest paid to
policyholder upon surrender
of the policy
___ 8. Policyholder usually pays the
same premium through the
life of the policy

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 4-62 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 9 What does an insurance rating tell you about the insurance company?

a. The company is licensed with the state in which it is operating.


b. The company has reasonable rates and is good on paying claims.
c. The company satisfies customers with the amount paid on claims.
d. The company is financially stable and good on paying claims.

Item 10 Which of the following lists the three approaches to determine insurance
needs?

a. Multiple household, needs, and assets


b. Multiple earnings, needs, and common sense
c. Multiple earnings, wants, and assets
d. Multiple policies, desires, and common sense

Items 11 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of approach to
Through 13 determine insurance needs from column 2 that best fits the description in
column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.

Column 1 Column 2

Description Type of Approach to Determine


Insurance Needs

___ 11. Examines financial a. Multiple household


situation and considers b. Multiple earnings
resources available c. Needs
___ 12. Determines required d. Common sense
amount of insurance as a e. Assets
direct function of the
annual income
___ 13. Calculates future
immediate and long-term
expenses to determine
amount of insurance
required

MCI Course 8101 4-63 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the correct answers to the exercise items. If you
have any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page


1 a 4-29
2 d 4-32
3 d 4-34
4 c 4-35
5 a 4-43
6 b 4-43
7 e 4-44
8 c 4-44
9 d 4-46
10 b 4-47
11 c 4-49
12 b 4-48
13 d 4-58

MCI Course 8101 4-64 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise


STUDY UNIT 5
WEIGHT CONTROL AND MILITARY APPEARANCE
Overview

Estimated 2 hours, 55 minutes


Study Time

Unit Scope This study unit will give you the required information for evaluating a
Marine’s physical fitness level. This unit will provide the SNCO with the
appropriate references for remedial and personal appearance programs.

Learning After completing this study unit, you will be able to


Objectives
• List the objectives of the Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body
Composition Manual.

• Define physical fitness.

• Identify the Marine Corps Order that states the objectives and purpose of
the Marine Corps physical fitness program.

• Identify the applicable references for weight control.

• Identify the applicable references for the remedial programs.

• Identify the applicable references for the personal appearance programs.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-1 Study Unit 5


Overview, Continued

In this Study This study unit contains the following lessons:


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Importance of Physical Fitness 5-3
Lesson 2 Basic Concepts of Physical Fitness 5-9
Lesson 3 Maintaining a Military Appearance 5-17
Lesson 4 Remedial Physical Training Program 5-33

MCI Course 8101 5-2 Study Unit 5


LESSON 1
IMPORTANCE OF PHYSICAL FITNESS
Introduction

Estimated 30 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson is designed to provide easy to use practical information. Further
it will provide guidelines to help you design and execute an optimal physical
fitness training program and nutrition programs. This guide is not about
“quick fixes.” It is about lifestyle changes. It is important to identify early
those who will have trouble meeting standards so that they may begin a
comprehensive program.

This lesson discusses federal government statistics on physical fitness, what


the Marine Corps policy on physical fitness is, and what benefits physical
fitness brings.

Learning After completion of this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Select the percentage of men and women who are overweight.

• Select, from a list, the order for the Marine Corps physical fitness
program.

• List the benefits of fitness.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 5-3
Marine Corps Policy 5-4
Ineffective Physical Fitness Programs 5-5
Benefits of Physical Fitness 5-6
Lesson 1 Exercise 5-7

MCI Course 8101 5-3 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1


Marine Corps Policy

General An effective physical conditioning program must have command support. It


is essential for leaders to understand the importance and the goals of the
Marine Corps physical conditioning program. Leaders should be visible and
active participants in physical conditioning programs. This is most
effectively done if leaders lead physical training (PT). Physical fitness must
be an integral part of a unit’s training mission.

Essential for The term “physical fitness” means different things to different people. To the
Battlefield Marine Corps it is an indispensable part of leadership and self-discipline and
Performance is necessary for performance on the battlefield.

Lack of Fitness According to recent federal government statistics, over 30 percent of men and
Widespread in women of all races are overweight or obese.
Society
A survey by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services indicated that
only 42 percent of adults participate in exercise on a regular basis.

Marine Corps Thankfully, the lack of fitness just discussed is not the case in the Marine
Physical Corps. Physical fitness has always been a vital part of Marine Corps life.
Conditioning Marine Corps Order 6100.12 states the physical conditioning program scope
Program as follows:
Every Marine must be physically fit, regardless of age, grade, or duty assignment. Fitness is
essential to the day-to-day effectiveness and combat readiness of the Marine Corps. Further,
physical fitness is an indispensable aspect of leadership. The habits of self-discipline required to
gain and maintain a high level of physical fitness are inherent in the Marine Corps way of life
and must be a part of the character of every Marine. Marines who are not physically fit can be a
detriment to the readiness and combat efficiency of their unit. Accordingly, every Marine will
engage in an effective Physical Conditioning Program (PCP) on a continuing and progressive
basis.

MCI Course 8101 5-4 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1


Ineffective Physical Fitness Programs

General Commanders must ensure that the time spent participating in physical fitness
activities is used effectively. PT should support the unit’s mission as well as
enhance unit cohesion, morale and physical fitness and health.

Ineffective PT programs can lead to

• lack of progress
• injuries
• poor morale
• wasted time

Factors Factors that may lead to an ineffective PT session are listed below:

• Unmotivated PT leaders
• Group too large for number of assigned leaders
• Workout too hard or too easy
• Poor exercise choice
• Failure to motivate participants
• Too many (or too long) rest breaks

MCI Course 8101 5-5 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1


Benefits of Physical Fitness

General Having a physically fit fighting force is a tremendous advantage for the
military commander both in peacetime and war. There are considerable
benefits to the individual Marine as well.

Commander’s The Commander's perspective on the benefits of fitness are listed below:
Perspective
• Less sick time
• Increased combat readiness
• More motivated Marines
• Increased morale
• Increased productivity
• More confidence in troops
• Better image for the Marine Corps
• Inspires public confidence in the Marine Corps
• More options on the battlefield

Individual The individual Marine's perspective on the benefits of fitness are listed below:
Marine’s
Perspective • More energy and confidence
• Better health
• Improved appearance
• Improved performance on physical fitness test (PFT)
• Increased combat readiness
• Personal satisfaction

MCI Course 8101 5-6 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 According to recent federal government statistics, what is the percentage of


men and women who are over weight?

a. 32
b. 33
c. 38
d. 39

Item 2 What Marine Corps Order states the scope of the Marine Corps physical
fitness program?

a. 6100.12
b. 6110.34
c. 2030.3J
d. 1020.2B

Item 3 List four benefits of fitness.

(1) ___________________________________________________________

(2) ___________________________________________________________

(3) ___________________________________________________________

(4) ___________________________________________________________

MCI Course 8101 5-7 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions about these items, refer to the reference page.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 b 5-4
2 a 5-4
3 (1) more energy and 5-6
confidence
(2) better health
(3) improved appearance
(4) improved performance on
PFT
(5) increased combat
readiness
(6) personal satisfaction

Summary In this lesson, you learned about the importance of physical fitness, Marine
Corps policy, and the benefits of fitness.

In the next lesson, you will learn about the concepts and physical conditions
of fitness.

MCI Course 8101 5-8 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1


LESSON 2
BASIC CONCEPTS OF PHYSICAL FITNESS
Introduction

Estimated 30 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the physical fitness terms, conditioning principles, and
states the goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program.

Learning Upon completion of this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Define physical fitness.

• List the five components of physical fitness.

• Identify the physical conditioning principles.

• List the goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program as listed
in MCO 6100.12.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 5-9
Physical Fitness Terms 5-10
Physical Conditioning Principles 5-11
The Marine Corps Physical Conditioning Program 5-12
Lesson 2 Exercise 5-13

MCI Course 8101 5-9 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2


Physical Fitness Terms

Definition Physical fitness can be defined as a state of good physical health. A


physically fit body is functioning properly and beyond that, functioning well.

Components The definitions of the components of physical fitness are listed in the table
below:

Component Definition
Cardiorespiratory Fitness The body’s ability to deliver oxygen to working
muscle and the ability of the working muscles to
utilize oxygen and remove waste products.
Cardiorespiratory fitness is directly related to the
health and function of the respiratory system, the
lungs, heart, and circulatory system.
Muscular Strength The amount of force that a muscle can produce.
We generally measure muscular strength by
performing specific exercises with weights or
with body weight (pull-ups or push-ups).
Muscular Endurance The ability to perform repeated actions or
movements over an extended period of time.
You measure muscular endurance when you
conduct the timed sit-up portion of the PFT.
Flexibility The ability to move a body part through a
complete range of motion with no pain.
Leanness (low body fat) A measure of the percentage of a person’s body
mass that is lean tissue and not body fat.

MCI Course 8101 5-10 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2


Physical Conditioning Principles

Progression There must be a gradual increase in difficulty and duration or both of a


physical fitness program for continual progress to be made. If there is no
progression in difficulty and/or duration of your physical training sessions,
your body eventually adapts to it and no further physiological changes
take place.

Specificity The adaptations that occur are highly specific to the activity that produced
those adaptations. In other words, you get better at what you do regularly.
For example, although swimming is a good exercise, it will not improve
three-mile run times as much as running will.

Overload The workload or intensity must be greater than that normally encountered by
the body to stimulate physiological changes. There must be a gradual
increase in difficulty or duration of a physical fitness program in order for
continual progress to be made.

Intensity Intensity refers to how hard or how difficult a physical fitness program is in
terms of physical exertion. Physical exertion meaning the degree of strength,
force, or energy used.

Recovery Adaptations to physical training programs do not occur during the course of
an exercise session. They occur during the recovery period. It may take days
to recover from a hard training session. Over training and injuries are
inevitable unless adequate recovery is a part of the physical fitness program.

MCI Course 8101 5-11 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2


The Marine Corps Physical Conditioning Program

General A good physical fitness program is aimed at improving all of the components
of physical fitness. The Marine Corps physical fitness test (PFT) is designed
to test all of these components and a good score on the PFT indicates that a
Marine is physically fit.

Goals The goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program (PCP) are
listed below:

• Contribute to the health and well-being of every Marine through regular


exercise and health education.

• Develop Marines who are physically capable of performing their duties in


garrison and in combat.

• Develop in Marines a reserve level of physical fitness that will enhance


their chances of winning in a combat situation.

• Provide a medium for developing the self-confidence of the individual


Marine and therefore enhances overall discipline, morale, esprit-de-corps,
unit efficiency, and the desire to excel within the Marine Corps.

MCI Course 8101 5-12 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the definition of physical fitness?

a. A state of good physical health


b. A state of negative physical health
c. Muscular strength
d. Leanness

Item 2 List the five components of physical fitness.

(1) ___________________________________________________________

(2) ___________________________________________________________

(3) ___________________________________________________________

(4) ___________________________________________________________

(5) ___________________________________________________________

Item 3 For continual progress to be made, ________ must be incorporated in your


physical fitness program.

a. specificity
b. overload
c. progression
d. intensity

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-13 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 What is specificity?

a. The gradual increase in difficulty or duration of a physical fitness


program.
b. Adaptations that occur are highly specific to the activity that produced
those adaptations.
c. The difficulty of the physical fitness program.
d. The intensity of the workout.

Item 5 What must you include in a workout to force the body to make physiological
changes?

a. Overload
b. Specificity
c. Recovery
d. Intensity

Item 6 What determines how difficult your workout is during a physical fitness
program?

a. Overload
b. Specificity
c. Recovery
d. Intensity

Item 7 Adaptations to physical training programs do not occur during the course of
an exercise session, they occur during the ______________________ period.

a. progression
b. overload
c. intensity
d. recovery

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-14 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 8 List the goals of the Marine Corps physical conditioning program.

(1) ___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

(2) ___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

(3) ___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

(4) ___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-15 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions about these items, refer to the reference page.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 5-10
2 (1) Cardiorespiratory fitness 5-10
(2) Muscular strength
(3) Muscular endurance
(4) Flexibility
(5) Leanness (low body fat)
3 c 5-11
4 b 5-11
5 a 5-11
6 d 5-11
7 d 5-11
8 a. Contribute to health and well- 5-12
being of every Marine through
regular exercise and health
education.
b. Develop Marines who are
physically capable of performing
their duties in garrison and in
combat.
c. Develop in Marines a reserve
level of physical fitness that will
enhance their chances of
winning in a combat situation.
d. Provide a medium for
developing the self-confidence
of the individual Marine and
thereby enhance overall
discipline, moral, esprit-de-
corps, unit efficiency, and the
desire to excel within the Marine
Corps.

MCI Course 8101 5-16 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise


LESSON 3
MAINTAINING A MILITARY APPEARANCE
Introduction

Estimated 45 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the knowledge needed for maintaining a military
appearance by utilizing healthy nutrition.

Learning Upon completion of this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the seven basic categories of nutrients.

• Identify the role of protein.

• Identify the role of carbohydrates.

• Identify the fate of excess protein or carbohydrates.

• Identify the role of fat.

• Identify the food guide pyramid.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-17 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page


Introduction 5-17
Seven Basic Nutrients 5-19
Calories 5-21
Vitamins 5-22
Minerals 5-23
Metabolic 5-24
Putting the Weight Control Plan Together 5-25
The Food Guide Pyramid 5-27
Lesson 3 Exercise 5-30

MCI Course 8101 5-18 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Seven Basic Nutrients

Introduction What follows is a sound nutritional program based on the best information we
have today. It is the basic approach recommended by organizations like the
American Heart Association, the American Dietetics Association, and the
National Institutes of Health.

Basic Concepts Foods contain combinations of nutrients and no single food contains all of the
nutrients in the amounts that are necessary for optimum health. For example,
oranges contain vitamin C but not B12.

The Basic The seven basic categories of nutrients are protein, carbohydrates, fat
Nutrients vitamins, minerals, fiber, and water.

Protein Good sources of protein are meats, fish, eggs, dairy products, beans, and
peanut butter. Protein serves primarily a structural role in the body. It is used
to make structures like skin, hair, fingernails, cartilage, tendons, and muscle
to name a few. Protein is also used to make some hormones and enzymes.
Because of these roles, protein is necessary for survival.

Carbohydrates Carbohydrates are used primarily as an energy source. The body can actually
store carbohydrates in muscle and the liver in a form called glycogen. There
are no established recommended daily allowances for carbohydrates. An
adequate intake is the amount that is necessary to support your daily activities
and keep body glycogen stores replenished. Sources of carbohydrates are
fruits, vegetables, rice, pasta, bread, grains, beans, and sugars.

Excess Excess protein is simply converted to fat. Excess carbohydrates are stored as
glycogen. When glycogen stores are full, excess carbohydrates are converted
to fat.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-19 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Seven Basic Nutrients, Continued

Fat and its Role Fat is used primarily as a source of energy for the body. A small amount of
fat is used to make hormones and cell membranes. Most of the fat in the
body is subcutaneous fat. Subcutaneous fat is the fat stored underneath the
skin. This is the fat that you can see on the hips, stomach, legs etc. If it is
loose and jiggles it is not water retention or a muscle that needs “toning,” it is
fat.

Good Examples A few good examples of fat are listed in the table below:
of Fat

Name Example
Polyunsaturated • Corn
• Flour
• Certain fish
• Nuts
Monounsaturated • Vegetable and nut oils
• Olive oil
• Peanut oil
• Canola oil
Saturated • Meats and dairy products
• Tropical oils (coconut and palm)
Cholesterol • Meats
• Animal products

MCI Course 8101 5-20 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Calories

Definition A calorie is a measure of the energy content of a food. Our bodies require a
certain number of calories (energy) to function. The number of calories that
we require each day to function is our metabolic rate.

Blood Saturated fat is most likely to elevate blood triglycerides, total cholesterol,
Triglycerides and LDL cholesterol (bad cholesterol). Saturated fats are solid at room
temperature. Elevated levels of these structural components are considered a
risk factor for heart disease.

One Pound of Fat contains nine calories per gram. One pound of fat contains 3,500 calories
Fat (this is how many calories you must burn to lose one pound of fat). Some
high fat foods are red meats, fried foods, potato chips, butter, eggs, bacon,
and many “junk” foods.

MCI Course 8101 5-21 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Vitamins

Definition Vitamins are various organic substances that have no caloric value and are
essential to nutrition.

Fruits and A diet that is rich in fruits and vegetables and contains all of the major food
Vegetables groups will supply the recommended daily allowance of vitamins and
minerals.

Fat-Soluble Vitamins A, D, E, and K are fat-soluble vitamins. A good source of vitamin


A and D can be found in animal products such as egg yolk, milk, or fish-liver
oil. Vitamin E can be found in leaves and seed germ oils. Vitamin K is
essential for the clotting of the blood and can be found in such foods as
spinach, broccoli, lettuce, and cabbage.

Water-Soluble The B and C vitamins are water-soluble. Vitamin B is essential to normal


blood formation. Vitamin C is found in fruits and leafy vegetables.

MCI Course 8101 5-22 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Minerals

Purpose Minerals are elements that are necessary for life. Many act as co-factors that
help enzymes and hormones function properly. Some minerals are heavy
metals and are toxic at high doses.

Fiber Fiber is a substance that cannot be digested or absorbed by the body. Plants
are our major source of fiber. High fiber foods are typically low in fat, a high
fiber diet is associated with a lower risk of heart disease.

Water Water is the most abundant substance in the human body. It accounts for one
half to four fifths of our bodyweight. Water is essential for the process of
digestion and absorption of nutrients and excretion of metabolic wastes.
Water is vital for the regulation of body temperature, which becomes
especially important if you PT in warm weather. We lose water through the
lungs, the skin, by sweating and in the urine. The recommended intake is
eight to ten cups of water daily.

What Does Not You can hydrate the body by drinking coffee and sodas as they do contain
Help water. However, due to high levels of caffeine you may have to drink twice
as much to achieve the same degree of hydration. Caffeine is a diuretic
meaning it tends to increase the flow of urine. Alcoholic drinks can actually
be dehydrating. In other words you lose more water than you gain.

Thirst Thirst is a poor indicator of hydration status in a hot environment. If you only
drink when you are thirsty in a hot environment, you will get dehydrated.

MCI Course 8101 5-23 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Metabolic

Metabolic Rate Our metabolic rate is made up of two components, our resting metabolism
and our active metabolism

• Our resting metabolism is simply how many calories our bodies burn
at rest.
• Active metabolism refers to the calories burned by activity (like exercise).

Keeping Track To determine metabolic rate, multiply your bodyweight (in lbs.) times:

• 10 if you are sedentary


• 15 if you are active
• 18 if you are very active and lean

This formula will give you the required amount of calories needed each
day to function.

Record One way to get a good estimate of your metabolic rate is to record your
caloric intake for two to three weeks. If your bodyweight has not changed
during the two to three week period, you simply take the daily average and
use this average as your metabolic rate. Your metabolic rate represents the
number of calories that you need to maintain your bodyweight at your current
level of activity.

MCI Course 8101 5-24 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Putting the Weight Control Plan Together

First The first step in putting together a nutritional program is to determine your
present caloric requirements or metabolic rate as described on page 2-25.

Second Next, you should determine your weight loss goals. Remember, weight loss
exceeding two pounds per week can be dangerous and are not recommended.

Your Goal Your goal should be to consume no more than 30 percent of your calories
from fat and no more than 10 percent of your calories from saturated fat.
Approximately 20 percent of your calories should come from protein and 50
percent from carbohydrates.

Tracking If you are serious about losing some weight, it is important to write down
everything you eat and drink (if it contains calories). Your tracking method
can be as complex or as simple as you want it to be. The key thing is that it is
functional and you understand it.

Time Item Quantity Calories


0600 Eggs, boiled 2 215
0600 Orange Juice 8 ozs 15
0600 Grits 1 bowl/ 10 ozs 180
0630 Apple 1 10

Multiply Them Next, you multiply the total grams of carbohydrates and protein by four and
the grams of fat by nine to determine the calories from each nutrient. Then
you divide the calories from each by the total calories to determine the
percentage of calories from each nutrient.

Item Grams Multiply by Equals


Fat 10g 9 90 calories
Carbohydrates 15g 4 60 calories
Protein 15g 4 60 calories
210 calories total

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-25 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Putting the Weight Control Plan Together, Continued

Percentage of The table below shows how to compute the percentage of calories from each
Calories nutrient.

Item Calories Divide by total calories % of calories


Fat 90 210 43
Carbohydrates 60 210 26
Protein 60 210 26

Where to The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requires nutrition labels on most
Receive the of the foods that you eat. The new nutrition label provides all of the
Information information that is necessary to make wise choices about what to eat. You
can determine the total calories from fats, carbohydrates, and protein and the
amount of saturated, monounsaturated and polyunsaturated fat in a product.

Meals Now that you have determined how many calories needed to achieve your
weight loss goal, you should try to spread out your caloric intake over as
many meals as possible. Six meals per day are recommended.

MCI Course 8101 5-26 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


The Food Guide Pyramid

Bread, Cereal, These foods provide complex carbohydrates an important source of energy.
Rice, and Pasta They also provide B vitamins, minerals, and fiber. Starchy foods are not
fattening if you do not add butter, cheese, or cream sauces. Select whole
grain products to maximize fiber and other nutrients.

Fruits Fruits are rich sources of vitamins, most notably vitamin C. They are low in
fat and calories. Select fresh fruits and fruit juices, and frozen, canned, or
dried fruits. Avoid fruit processed with heavy syrups and sugar-sweetened
juices.

Vegetables Vegetables provide vitamins (especially A and C), are excellent sources of
fiber, and are naturally low in fat. For maximum nutrients, select dark leafy
greens, deep-yellow or orange vegetables, and starchy vegetables like
potatoes and yams.

Meat, Poultry, Meat and fish are excellent sources of protein, iron, zinc, and B vitamins, as
Fish, Dry are beans, nuts, and seeds. Tofu (made from soybeans) and white beans also
Beans, Eggs, supply calcium. Some seeds, like almonds, are good sources of vitamin E.
and Nuts

Milk, Yogurt, Milk products are the richest sources of calcium. They also provide protein
and Cheese and vitamin B12. Choose low-fat varieties to keep calories, cholesterol, and
saturated fat at a minimum.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-27 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


The Food Guide Pyramid, Continued

Fats, Oils, and Used sparingly, these foods provide calories, but little else nutritionally.
Sweets Exceptions are vegetable oil, which is a rich source of vitamin E (one
tablespoon is all you need), and molasses, an excellent source of iron.

Review the Lastly, review the process of setting up a nutritional program


Process
• Determine your daily calorie intake (metabolic rate).

• Subtract 500 calories a day, for a one-pound per week weight loss and
1,000 calories a day, for a two-pound per week weight loss.

• Determine the percentage of your calories from fats, carbohydrates, and


protein.

• Adjust total calories and the amount of fats, carbohydrates, and protein to
obtain the appropriate levels.

• Spread your calories over five to six small meals instead of one to two big
meals.

Benefits Eating several meals a day helps to prevent hunger and stimulates your
metabolism. Research indicates that people actually eat less if they eat more
often (provided that the snacks are not junk food). It may also help to prevent
some muscle mass loss associated with reducing caloric intake.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-28 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


The Food Guide Pyramid, Continued

Food Guide Use the food guide pyramid below to get your recommended servings of each
Pyramid food group a day.

MCI Course 8101 5-29 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3


Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Vitamins, minerals, water, fiber, protein, carbohydrates, and fat are the seven
basic categories of

a. nutrients.
b. supplements.
c. energy.
d. strength.

Item 2 What is the role of protein?

a. A source of energy
b. A source nutrients
c. A structural role in the body
d. Supports the daily routine

Item 3 The role of carbohydrates is a

a. source of energy.
b. structural role in the body.
c. source of nutrients.
d. source of cartilage.

Item 4 What does excess protein and carbohydrates turn into?

a. Sugars
b. Protein
c. Nutrients
d. Fat

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-30 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 5 The role of fat is

a. structural role.
b. source of energy that the body uses.
c. daily supplement.
d. source of strength.

Item 6 How many groups comprise the food guide pyramid?

a. Five
b. Six
c. Seven
d. Eight

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-31 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions about these items, refer to the reference page.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 5-19
2 c 5-19
3 a 5-19
4 d 5-19
5 b 5-20
6 b 5-29

Summary In this lesson, you have learned about the seven basic nutrients and the food
guide pyramid.

In the next lesson, you will learn about the remedial physical training
program.

MCI Course 8101 5-32 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise


LESSON 4
REMEDIAL PHYSICAL TRAINING PROGRAM
Introduction

Estimated 30 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the knowledge needed to complete a remedial program
to loose weight, and to properly keep track of your process.

Learning Upon completion of this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the applicable references for the remedial programs.

• Identify the applicable references for the personal appearance program.


• State the maximum recommended weight loss (in pounds) per week.
• State the minimum recommended caloric intake for normal adults.

• State three undesirable effects of starvation diets and fasting.


• State the daily caloric deficit necessary to produce a one to two-pound
weight loss per week.

• List the four important components of a weight loss program.

• State the primary determinant of your resting metabolic rate.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-33 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


Introduction, Continued

Learning • Identify the effectiveness of using sweat suits or sauna suits to loose
Objectives, weight.
continued
• Identify the concept of “spot reduction.”

• Identify the effectiveness of “spot reduction.”

• Identify the disadvantage of using only the scale to determine weight loss
progress.

• Identify the basic principle behind body circumference measurement, skin


fold calipers, hydrostatic weighing, bioelectrical impedance, and near
infrared interacted as methods of estimating body fat percentage.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 5-33
References 5-35
Losing Pounds 5-36
Four Components 5-37
Ineffective Methods of Losing Weight 5-38
How to Measure Your Weight Loss 5-39
Lesson 4 Exercise 5-41

MCI Course 8101 5-34 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


References

General Applicable references for remedial and personal appearance programs are
listed in the table below:

Reference Description
MCO 6100.12 Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test And Body
Composition Program Manual
MCO P1900.16F Separation and Retirement Manual
MCO P1610.7E Performance Evaluation System
MCO P1070.12K Individual Records Administration Manual
MCO P1080.35F Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual
MCO 5000.12D Pregnancy and Parenthood

MCI Course 8101 5-35 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


Losing Pounds

Weight Loss The American College of Sports Medicine recommends a calorie deficit of no
more than 500 to 1,000 calories daily. This would produce a weight loss of
approximately one to two pounds per week.

Minimum Daily caloric intake of less than 1,200 for normal adults may lead to excessive
weight loss from tissues other than adipose (fat) tissue. These losses may
include a significant loss of muscle mass, muscle, and liver glycogen and a
reduction in blood volume and body fluids.

Starvation Starvation diets (diets that have insufficient calories to sustain life) and
fasting has been associated with weakness, fainting, and also congestive heart
failure and death.

MCI Course 8101 5-36 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


Four Components

Moderate Once you have determined your daily caloric requirements at your current
Caloric body weight, you should reduce your daily caloric intake by 500 to 1,000
Reduction calories per day.

Aerobic Since aerobic exercises are continuous in nature they tend to burn more
Exercise calories per unit of time than other types of exercise.

Strength The biggest variable component of lean body mass is muscle mass. When
Training people try to lose weight by dieting alone, they tend to lose lean body mass.
In fact, if you lose weight too rapidly (more than two pounds per week), 50
percent or more of the weight loss can come from lean body mass.

Low-Fat Diet When you eat low-fat foods, you can eat more and consume fewer calories.
Since it is total calories that will determine whether you lose weight or not,
this is an important consideration. High-fat foods are very calorically dense.
In other words, they contain lots of calories for very little food.

Resting Heart Your total lean body mass is the primary determinant of your resting
Rate metabolic rate. Remember, heart rate is beats per minute and the average
resting heart rate is 60-70 beats per minute.

MCI Course 8101 5-37 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


Ineffective Methods of Losing Weight

Sweat Suits and The only thing you accomplish when you wear heavy sweat suits to induce
Saunas sweating during exercise is a decrease in your exercise capacity. As a result,
you exercise less and burn fewer calories. In addition, heavy sweat suits and
sauna suits can cause heat stress injuries and dehydration.

Spot Reduction Spot reduction refers to the concept of working a specific area of the body in
an attempt to remove fat from that area. Spot reduction does not work. The
problem is that depletion of fat stores is controlled by hormones and has
nothing to do with which part of the body is being worked.

Eating Meals Eating smaller meals more often than not prevents hunger and preserves
energy levels and metabolism. People who skip meals often compensate by
eating more later.

MCI Course 8101 5-38 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


How to Measure Your Weight Loss

Scale While it would be easy to just jump on the scale and weigh yourself everyday,
this approach is not very productive. This is because you may be gaining
muscle while losing fat. Your body weight will fluctuate by several pounds
during the day. Weighing in first thing in the morning will give you the most
consistent and most accurate results.

Body A greater neck circumference is indicative of a more muscle mass while a


Circumference greater abdominal circumference is indicative of more fat. The average error
Measurement rate for body circumference method is 3.5 percent.

Skin Fold This technique involves measuring skin fold thickness in several locations by
Calipers pinching the skin with your fingers and using a set of calipers to measure the
thickness of the fold. The average error for this technique is estimated to be
3 percent.

Hydrostatic A body when immersed in water will be buoyed up by a force equal to the
Weighing weight of the volume of water displaced. In practical terms, fat floats, lean
mass sinks. A person with a high percentage of body fat will be heavy on
land but light in the water because fat floats and gives him extra buoyancy.
The average error for hydrostatic weighing is estimated to be plus or minus
1.5 percent.

Near Infrared Infrared methods of determining body composition are based on light
Interactance absorption and reflectance. A near infrared light probe is placed on specific
body sites. Some of the infrared light is absorbed and some is reflected,
based on light absorption, body composition can be determined. This method
is not considered to be very accurate, it has been shown to under and over
predict body fat percentage in some individuals by over 4 percent.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-39 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


How to Measure Your Weight Loss, Continued

Bioelectrical There are several types of bioelectrical impedance devices available. The
Impedance principle use is that of electrical current resistance. Fat is a poor conductor of
electricity while lean mass is a good conductor. Therefore, the higher the
impedance values, the higher the percentage of body fat. If done properly
bioelectrical impedance has an average error of plus or minus 3 percent.

Bioelectrical To obtain an accurate reading, you must


Reading for
Accuracy • Abstain from eating and drinking within 4 hours of the test.
• Avoid exercising within 12 hours of the test.
• Urinate completely prior to testing.
• Do not drink alcohol within 48 hours of the test.
• Avoid taking diuretics prior to testing unless instructed by your physician.

MCI Course 8101 5-40 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4


Lesson 4 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 23 by performing the action required. Check your
answer against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Select the applicable order for Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body
Composition Program Manual.

a. MCO 6100.12
b. MCO 6100.3K
c. MCO P1900.16F
d. MCO P1610.7E

Item 2 Select the applicable order for pregnancy and parenthood.

a. MCO 6100.10B
b. MCO 6100.12
c. MCO 5000.12D
d. MCO P1080.35F

Item 3 Select the applicable order for the separation and retirement manual.

a. MCO 6100.10B
b. MCO 6100.12
c. MCO P1900.16F
d. MCO P1610.7E

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-41 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise


Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 What is the maximum amount of pounds recommended to lose per week?

a. One
b. Two
c. Three
d. Four

Item 5 Identify the minimum recommended caloric intake for normal adults.

a. 1,400
b. 1,300
c. 1,200
d. 1,100

Item 6 Identify one of the three undesirable effects of starvation diets and fasting.

a. Weight gain
b. Strength gain
c. Endurance gain
d. Congestive heart failure

Item 7 What is the daily caloric deficit necessary to produce a one to two pound
weight loss per week?

a. 100 to 200
b. 250 to 750
c. 500 to 1,000
d. 1,000 to 2,000

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-42 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise


Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 8 What is one of the four important components of a weight loss program?

a. High-fat diet
b. Low-fat diet
c. High carbohydrates
d. High protein

Item 9 What is the primary determinant of your resting heart rate?

a. Body endurance
b. Strength
c. Lean body mass
d. High-fat foods

Item 10 The only effective thing heavy sweat suits and sauna does to induce weight
loss is

a. produces weight loss.


b. produces strength.
c. decreases sweat.
d. decreases your exercise capacity.

Item 11 What is spot reduction?

a. Working out at a specific facility


b. Working a specific area of the body
c. Ceasing to eat specific foods
d. Skipping meals

Item 12 What is the effectiveness of spot reduction?

a. Nothing
b. Lose weight fast
c. Tone the area
d. Lose fat from the area

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-43 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise


Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 13 What is an advantage of eating frequent small meals?

a. Creates more strength


b. Causes weight gain
c. Lose energy
d. Prevents hunger

Item 14 What is one of the disadvantages of using only the scale to weigh yourself?

a. You cannot find one


b. You may be gaining muscle while losing fat
c. You get one reading only
d. There is no height measurement

Item 15 What is the principle of body circumference measurement?

a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water


b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it
c. Measuring the body’s fat using light absorption
d. Measuring the body’s neck and abdomen

Item 16 What is the principle of hydrostatic weighing?

a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water


b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it
c. Measuring the body’s fat using light absorption
d. Measuring the body’s neck and abdomen

Item 17 What is the principle of skin fold calipers?

a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water


b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it
c. Measuring the body’s fat using light absorption
d. Measuring the body’s neck and abdomen

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-44 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise


Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 18 What is the principle of near infrared interactance?

a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water


b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it
c. Measuring the bodies fat using light absorption
d. Measuring the bodies neck and abdomen

Item 19 What is the principle of bioelectrical impedance?

a. Measuring the body by immersing it in water


b. Measuring the thickness of the skin by pinching it
c. Measuring the bodies fat using light absorption
d. Measuring the bodies weight through electrical current resistance

Item 20 What is the percentage amount of accuracy for skin fold measurement?

a. 1.5 percent
b. 3 percent
c. 3.5 percent
d. 4 percent

Item 21 What is the percentage amount of accuracy for the body circumference
measurement?

a. 1.5 percent
b. 3 percent
c. 3.5 percent
d. 4 percent

Item 22 What is the percentage amount of accuracy for the near infrared interactance?

a. 1.5 percent
b. 3 percent
c. 3.5 percent
d. 4 percent

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 5-45 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise


Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 5-35
2 c 5-35
3 c 5-35
4 b 5-36
5 c 5-36
6 d 5-36
7 c 5-37
8 b 5-37
9 c 5-37
10 d 5-38
11 b 5-38
12 a 5-38
13 d 5-38
14 b 5-39
15 d 5-39
16 a 5-39
17 b 5-39
18 c 5-39
19 d 5-40
20 b 5-39
21 c 5-39
22 d 5-39

Summary In this lesson, you learned about remedial physical training programs,
personal appearance, dieting, weight loss, and how to properly track your
progress.

MCI Course 8101 5-46 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise


STUDY UNIT 6
PERSONNEL RECORDS
Overview

Estimated 1 hour, 45 minutes


Study Time

Unit Scope This study unit discusses the evaluation of an individual Marine’s
performance records. It also outlines methods to audit and correct these
important documents.

Learning After completing this study unit, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify documents that are used to audit performance evaluation records.

• Identify methods to correct fitness reports.

• Identify Service Record accountability and audit requirements.

In This Study This study unit contains the following lessons:


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Performance Evaluation System (PES) Audit Procedures 6-3
Lesson 2 Correcting Fitness Reports 6-19
Lesson 3 Personnel Record Accountability and Audit Procedures 6-29

MCI Course 8101 6-1 Study Unit 6


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 6-2 Study Unit 6


LESSON 1
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SYSTEM (PES) AUDIT
PROCEDURES
Introduction

Estimated 35 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP), which
entails the evaluation of two key documents: the Master Brief Sheet (MBS)
and the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF).

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Explain the purpose of the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP).

• Identify references that contain information on Performance Records.

• State the purpose of the Master Brief Sheet.

• Identify the two sections of the Master Brief Sheet.

• Identify correcting authorities of the Master Brief Sheet header data.

• Identify the Fitness Report Listing section of the Master Brief Sheet.

• State the purpose of the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF).

• Identify different folders of the OMPF.

• Identify the procedure to audit and correct OMPF folders.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-3 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 6-3
Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP) 6-5
Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) 6-8
Auditing the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF) 6-12
Lesson Exercise 1 6-14

MCI Course 8101 6-4 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP)

Introduction The Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP) is the Marine Corps program to
ensure accuracy of Marines' performance records. There are two related
performance records maintained by Headquarters Marine Corps (HQMC):

• Master Brief Sheet (MBS)


• Official Military Personnel File (OMPF)

These important records must be kept current and correct in every detail
because they become pillars of good personnel management decisions made
at HQMC.

Purpose of the The Marine Corps developed the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP) to
FRAP provide a process for Marines. It ensures accuracy and completeness of
performance records by periodically placing them in the hands of individual
Marines. The FRAP process ensures continual reliability of the MBS and
OMPF.

Support The following are support functions of the FRAP:


Functions of
the FRAP • Reports date gaps via the command’s Unit Diary advisory date gap
notification process.

• Provides opportunity for Marines to periodically request and audit


performance records.

• Informs Marines of any action required to correct records or recover


missing reports.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-5 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP), Continued

MBS Mail Out Sergeants and above receive a mailing of the MBS annually based on the last
digit of their social security number. Marines on active duty will have their
MBS sent to their military address. Marines not on active duty will have their
MBS mailed to their homes of record. Accurate and up-to-date information
in the Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS) is essential for timely
receipt of MBS.

Example Marines whose social security number ends with

• Two receive their MBS in February


• Six receive their MBS in June
• Zero receive their MBS in October

OMPF Mail Upon completion of a selection board, HQMC (MMSB-33) mails the OMPFs
Out of Marines in the eligibility or below zone for that board. This is the only
scheduled time HQMC automatically sends OMPFs to Marines. Marines
should order their OMPFs and review them every 2 years. Marines planning
to apply for such programs as the Warrant Officer, MECEP, or Active
Reserve (AR), should order their OMPF at least 12 months in advance of the
program to allow for any needed correction.

MBS and Written requests can be submitted to the following address:


OMPF Request
Commandant of the Marine Corps (MMSB 10)
Headquarters U.S. Marine Corps
2008 Elliot Road
Quantico, VA 22134-5030

Submit FAX requests to:

Commandant of the Marine Corps (MMSB-10)


Headquarters U.S. Marine Corps
DSN: 278-5792 or Comm (703) 784-5792

Note: Be sure to include name, grade, SSN, signature, and mailing address.
Additionally, visit the Personnel Management Support Branch
(MMSB) web site for additional information.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-6 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP), Continued

References Provided below is a list of references that pertains to performance records and
audit procedures.

• MCO P1070.12_ Marine Corps Individual Records Administration


Manual (IRAM)

• MCO P1080.40_ Marine Corps Total Force System Personnel Reporting


Instructions Manual (MCTFSPRIM)

• MCO P1610.7_ Performance Evaluation System (PES)

• MCO P1610.11_ Performance Evaluation Appeals

MCI Course 8101 6-7 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS)

Purpose of the The MBS is a ready reference document used in the personnel management
MBS process. The purpose of the MBS is to provide key personal data and a
summary of a Marine’s performance evaluation record. The MBS has two
sections:

• Header Data
• Fitness Report Listing

MBS Header The header data provides service information extracted directly from the
Data Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS).

Auditing the An audit of the MBS header data consists of comparing the information listed
MBS Header in each block against that of its source document. The block “Correcting
Data MBS Header Data” gives a description of each item and the respective
correcting authority.

Correcting Each of the items on the MBS is corrected via certain authorities. An
MBS Header illustration of the MBS header along with the MBS listing and correcting
Data authorities are provided below:

MBS Listing Correcting Authority


1. Name Unit Diary
2. Social Security Number Unit Diary
3. Grade Enlisted Unit Diary
4. Rank Description Unit Diary

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-8 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS), Continued

Correcting
MBS Header
Data,
continued

MBS Listing Correcting Authority


5. Date of Rank Enlisted Unit Diary
6. Component Enlisted Unit Diary
7. Lineal No CMC (MMPR)
8. Primary MOS Unit Diary
9. Additional MOS Enlisted Unit Diary
10. GT/GCT CMC (MA)
11. Permanent Grade CMC (MMPR)
12. Permanent Date of Rank CMC (MMPR)
13. Date of Birth Unit Diary
14. Date of Original Entry into the Armed Unit Diary
Forces
15. Pay Entry Base Date Enlisted Unit Diary
16. Armed Forces Active Duty Base Date Unit Diary
17. Active Naval Service Base Date CMC (MMPR)
18. ACC 1st Marine Corps Commission Unit Diary
19. Date of Rank 1st Commission Active CMC (MMPR)
Reserve Unit Diary
20. Date of Rank 1st Commission as an LDO CMC (MMPR)
21. Date Designated a Military Pilot Reserve CMC (RAM)
22. Date Current Active Duty Began Unit Diary
23. Service Date CMC (MMPR)
24. Expiration of Active Service Enlisted Unit Diary
25. Date Current Tour Began Unit Diary
26. Overseas Control Date Unit Diary
27. Contract/Legal Agreement Active CMC (MMOA)
28. Decorations Unit Diary
29. Military Education Unit Diary
30. Civilian Education Unit Diary
31. Languages CMC (MA)
32. Special Information N/A

MCI Course 8101 6-9 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS), Continued

Fitness Report This portion of the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) lists the Marine’s fitness
Listing reports starting from the rank of sergeant. This format makes it simple to
view, analyze, and compare fitness report information. Provided below is an
illustration of the Fitness Report Listing.

Breakdown of The illustration and table below describes the breakdown of the Fitness
the Fitness Report Listing.
Report Listing

Section Listing Description


A Monitored Command Marine’s assigned command
Organization/School Specific command or unit to which the
Marine is assigned for duty
Reporting Senior Name of the Marine’s Reporting Senior
B Duty Assignment Primary duty to which the Marine Reported
On (MRO) has been assigned
Grade Marine’s grade on the fitness report
Type Duty Type of the Marine’s duty on the fitness
report
BILMOS Billet MOS of the duty to which the Marine
has been assigned
Reviewing Officer Name of Marine’s Reviewing Officer
C OCC Occasion for submitting the report
D Begin Date Beginning date of the reporting period

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-10 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Auditing the Master Brief Sheet (MBS), Continued

Breakdown of
the Fitness
Report Listing,
continued

Section Listing Description


End Date Ending date of the reporting period
E Mission/Character/ Markings from the Performance Anchored
Leadership/Intellect/ Rating Scales per sections D, E, F, G, and
Eval Responsibility H of the fitness report
F Promotion Reflects the RS promotion recommendation
for the Marine Reported on (an X in the
ACC column indicates recommendation for
accelerated promotion)
G Report Summary
COM Reflects whether or not the Marine has been
subject to commendatory material during
reporting period
ADV Reflects whether or not the contents of the
report constitute a derogatory evaluation of
the Marine (an X indicates the report is
adverse)
# RPTS @ PROC Reflects the number of fitness reports
written by the RS on Marines of the same
grade as the MRO as of the time of
processing the MROs report
REL VAL @ PROC Relative value of the MRO fitness report
based on the RSs rating history for Marines
of the same grade as the MRO as of the
time of processing of the MROs report
# RPTS CUM Number of fitness reports written by the RS
on Marines of the same grade as the MRO
at the time the MROs MBS is printed
REL VAL CUM Relative value of the MROs fitness report
based on the RSs rating history for Marines
of the same grade as the MRO at the time
the MROs MBS is printed
RO Concurs Whether the Reviewing Officer (RO)
concurs or does not concur with the RS’s
evaluation of the MRO

MCI Course 8101 6-11 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Auditing the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF)

Purpose of the The OMPF provides a history of the Marine’s career from entrance into the
OMPF Marine Corps until the present. Administrative materials or documents to
support the chronology of events for the Marine’s history are incorporated in
the OMPF.

Structure of The OMPF is structured into the following areas:


OMPF
• Service Folder (S Folder)
• Commendatory/Derogatory Folder (C Folder)
• Performance Folder (P Folder)
• Field Folder/OQR/SRB (F Folder)
• Health/Dental Folder (H Folder)

S Folder Consists of contract information, discharge documents, reserve documents,


(Service) orders to active duty, and general administrative, and service documents used
to compute service time for benefits, programs, or retirement.

C Folder This folder contains documents on civilian and military education, personal
(Commenda- awards information, courts-martial/non-judicial punishments, and other
tory/Deroga- material reflecting personal achievement or adversity that is pertinent to
tory) making decisions for purposes of selection, assignment, and retention.

P Folder Contains fitness reports and standard addendum pages for all sergeants and
(Performance) above.

F Folder Upon separation from the Marine Corps, documents contained in the Service
(Field OQR/ Record Book/Officer Qualification Record (SRB/OQR) are filed in the
SRB) Service Folder. If a Marine has periods of broken service, documents from
previous OQR/SRBs will be contained in the Field Folder.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-12 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Auditing the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF), Continued

H Folder Unless a Marine had broken service, which ended before 1994, or is presently
(Health/ on the Temporary Disability Retired List (TDRL), no health folder is
Dental) maintained. Following discharge, health and dental records are sent to

Department of Veteran Affairs


P.O. Box 150950
St. Louis, MO 63115

Incorporating All material forwarded to the CMC (MMSB) for inclusion in the OMPF must
Material into contain the grade, full name, and SSN. The mailing address is
OMPF
CMC (MMSB-20)
1008 Elliot Road,
Quantico, VA 22134-5030

Audit of the The OMPF is the primary record used by selection boards. The section on the
OMPF “FRAP” provides information on when OMPF’s are automatically provided
to Marines. However Marines should request a copy of their OMPF for
review and correction under the following circumstances:

• At least once every 2 years


• At least 12 months prior to the convening of a selection board, when
eligible
• At least 12 months prior to applying for programs such as Warrant
Officer, Marine Corps Enlisted Commissioning Education Program, etc.

Correcting the If information not pertaining to the Marine is found in the OMPF during the
OMPF audit, the Marine should request removal of the information by submitting a
written request to CMC (MMSB-10).

Board for Marines may petition the Board for Correction of Naval Records (BCNR) to
Correction of remove documents on file in the OMPF, which they consider adverse, unjust,
Naval Records and inaccurate.
(BCNR)

MCI Course 8101 6-13 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 17 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the purpose of the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP)?

a. Gives Marines an opportunity to vent


b. Provides insight on the Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS)
c. Provides a process for Marines to ensure the accuracy and completeness
of performance records
d. Places performance records in the hands of the Responsible Officer (RS)

Item 2 Which of the following are references that contain information on


performance records?

a. MCO P1070.12_ Marine Corps Individual Records Administration


Manual (IRAM)
b. MCO P1610.7_ Performance Evaluation System (PES)
c. MCO P1080.40_ Marine Corps Total Force System Personnel Reporting
Instructions Manual (MCTFSPRIM)
d. All of the above

Item 3 The purpose of the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) is to

a. provide key personal data and a summary of a Marine’s performance


evaluation record.
b. provide a listing of a Marine’s fitness report from most recent to oldest.
c. explain in detail all responsible officer remarks.
d. provide statistical data of a Marine’s proficiency and conduct.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-14 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 Which are two sections of the Master Brief Sheet?

a. Top and bottom section


b. Header data and responsible officer remarks
c. Header data and fitness report listing
d. Correcting authority and master brief sheet listing

Item 5 Name, social security number, and rank description on the Master Brief Sheet
are corrected via

a. CMC (MMPR)
b. CMC (MA)
c. Active CMC (MMOA)
d. The unit diary

Items 6 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from
Through 10 column 2 that best describes the listing in column 1. The answers in column 2
may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Listing Description

___ 6. OCC a. Number of fitness reports written by


___ 7. Organization/School RS on Marines of same grade as
___ 8. Promotion MRO as of time of processing report
___ 9. #RPTS @ PROC b. RS promotion recommendation
___ 10. REL VAL @ PROC c. Command or unit to which the
Marine was assigned for duty
d. Occasion for submitting report
e. Relative value of the MRO fitness
report based on the RSs rating history
for Marines of the same grade as the
MRO

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-15 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 11 The OMPF provides a(n) ______ of the Marine’s ______ from entrance into
the Marine Corps until the present.

a. analysis, statistics
b. snapshot, data
c. history, career
d. report, production

Items 12 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from
Through 16 column 2 that best describes the folder in column 1. The answers in column 2
may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Folder Description

___12. Commendatory/Derogatory a. Documents on civilian and military


___13. Performance education, personal awards, and other
___14. Field material pertinent to selection,
___15. Service assignment, and retention decisions
___16. Health/Dental b. Unless broken service, no records are
held
c. Contract information, discharge
documents, reserve documents, orders
to active duty, and general administra-
tiveand service documents to compute
or service time for benefits program or
retirement
d. Fitness reports and standard addendum
pages for sergeants and above
e. Contains documents from previous
OQR/SRBs if a Marine has periods of
broken service

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-16 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 17 Marines should request a copy of their OMPF for review and correction under
which circumstance?

a. At least once every two years


b. At least 12 months prior to the convening board
c. At least 12 months prior to applying for programs such as Warrant Officer
and Marine Corps Enlisted Commissioning Education Program
d. All of the above

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-17 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 c 6-5
2 d 6-7
3 a 6-8
4 c 6-8
5 d 6-8
6 d 6-10
7 c 6-10
8 b 6-11
9 a 6-11
10 e 6-11
11 c 6-12
12 a 6-12
13 d 6-12
14 e 6-12
15 c 6-12
16 b 6-13
17 d 6-13

MCI Course 8101 6-18 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise


LESSON 2
CORRECTING FITNESS REPORTS
Introduction

Estimated 30 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope The purpose of this lesson is to identify the role of Headquarters Marine
Corps (HQMC) in the Performance Evaluation System (PES). We will also
discuss actions to take in order to correct fitness report records.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the role of the Performance Evaluation Section (PES) of the
Personnel Management Support Branch.

• Identify steps taken to request administrative corrections of fitness


reports.

• Identify steps taken to correct date gaps caused by missing fitness reports.

In This Lesson The lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 6-19
Headquarters Marine Corps Functions 6-20
Correction of Fitness Report Records 6-22
Lesson 2 Exercise 6-25

MCI Course 8101 6-19 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2


Headquarters Marine Corps Functions

Performance The Performance Evaluation Section (MMSB 30) of the Personnel


Evaluation Management Support Branch (MMSB) HQMC implements performance
Section evaluation policy and procedures, and collects, maintains, and provides
(MMSB) Role essential data to support CMC’s personnel management responsibilities
(including assignment, retention, and promotion of Marines).

Organization The Performance Evaluation Section is organized into the primary functional
units of Policy and Research, Fitness Report Processing, and Reserve
Matters. The descriptions of these units in the following blocks provide a
better understanding of available support.

Policy and This unit is responsible for fitness report policy, research, correction, and
Research Unit accountability for all active duty personnel.
(MMSB 31)

Fitness Report This unit is responsible for initial screening and processing of all fitness
Processing Unit reports into the automated system, forwarding correct reports to the CMC
(MMSB 32) (MMSB 20) for inclusion in the Official Military Personnel File (OMPF), and
providing liaison for MMSB board support.

Reserve This unit specifically monitors Reserve Component issues and manages
Matters Unit fitness report matters that are unique to Reserve organizations and functions.
(MMSB 34)

USMC Fitness Throughout the Marine Corps, performance evaluation responsibilities


Report include ensuring fitness reports are administratively, procedurally correct, and
Processing processed into the automated system by the Fitness Report Processing Unit
(MMSB 32). Some specific tasks include the following:

• Ensuring reports are administratively correct.


• Auditing fitness reports for adherence to policy.
• Entering fitness reports into the database and ensuring their accuracy.
• Reconstructing those reports which are missing from the OMPF.
• Preparing the correspondence necessary for follow-up action to correct
erroneous reports.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-20 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2


Headquarters Marine Corps Functions, Continued

Fitness Report Furthermore, the Fitness Report Processing Unit is responsible to help
Accountability Marines ensure their fitness report records are complete, current, and
preparing correspondence as necessary to obtain any missing reports.
Specific tasks include the following:

• Supervising policies regarding accountability of required fitness reports


and audits of fitness report records

• Providing unit diary notification to reporting units concerning date gaps


for all Marines

Identifying When performance evaluation mistakes are found, the Fitness Report
Mistakes Processing Unit is responsible to correct all identified errors on fitness reports
prior to processing the report or upon identification of errors in existing
performance evaluation records.

Making Finally, whenever they occur, the Fitness Report Processing Unit is
Corrections responsible to correct all identified errors on fitness reports before processing
the report. Specific tasks include the following:

• Correcting administrative errors at HQMC if possible


• Returning reports to the field for correction

• The Performance Evaluation section will return these reports to the


Reviewing Officer (RO) for distribution.

• All returned reports will include a notation sheet with an explanation


of why the report is being returned.

MCI Course 8101 6-21 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2


Correction of Fitness Report Records

Authority The Commandant of the Marine Corps (CMC) has the authority to correct
fitness report records when the errors are limited solely to factual matters and
when documentary evidence indicates that the record contains erroneous
information. Requests to correct these reports are forwarded through a
specific process.

Administrative CMC has the authority to correct section A information and statements of fact
Corrections in sections B, C, I, and K that are completely devoid of thought and
significance.

Requesting Requests for administrative corrections should be submitted as follows:


Administrative
Corrections

Step Action
1 The Marine must submit the request via one of the reporting
officials identified on the original report (preferably the Reporting
Senior).
2 The RS or RO must endorse the request indicating only those
changes, which are valid and provide documentation as applicable.
3 Forward the endorsed correspondence to the CMC (MMSB 31) for
Active component Marines or (MMSB 34) for Reserve
Component Marines.

Note: Anticipate at least 120 days from the time of receipt at HQMC for
completion of the requested corrections.

Substantive All other corrections are inherently judgmental. The Secretary of the Navy,
Corrections acting through the Board for Correction of Naval Records (BCNR), can
approve a revised assessment of a Marine’s conduct or performance based
entirely on facts about the Marine that were unknown when the original report
was prepared.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-22 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2


Correction of Fitness Report Records, Continued

Supplemental Situations may occur after submission of a fitness report in which the RS or
Comments RO is subsequently made aware of new facts that reflect upon the
performance of the Marine during a specific reporting period. Reporting
officials may forward a request for inclusion of supplemental comments into
official records. To make such a request, the RS or RO must

• Submit the comments on an addendum page; include a cover letter that


identifies the new information and provides justification for its inclusion
into the report.

• Limit requests solely to factual matters with the documentary evidence as


appropriate, indicating the previously missing information.

Missing Fitness To ensure each sergeant and above has a complete fitness report record on file
Reports is a shared responsibility.

• CMC will notify reporting units via unit diary advisories to identify date
gaps for all Marines.

• Commanding officers, senior enlisted advisors, and reporting officials,


must assist Marines in correcting incomplete fitness reports.

• Individual Marines have a responsibility to periodically audit their records


especially in advance of eligibility before a particular selection board and
prior to reenlistment.

• Date gaps of 30 days or less are not significant and do not require
correction.

Late Fitness Fitness reports are due to the CMC (MMSB 32) within 30 days of the end of
Reports the reporting period. Although late submission is not recommended, it does
not render a fitness report invalid.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-23 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2


Correction of Fitness Report Records, Continued

Problem of Date gaps occur when there is a lapse in the reporting period. These gaps
Date Gaps In may occur for any number of reasons. Nonetheless, it is the responsibility of
Fitness Reports the Marine to take action to get the discrepancy corrected. Failure to correct
date gaps in the reporting period may delay a Marine’s promotion to the next
rank.

Correcting To warrant correction of date gaps, the date gap must be 31 days or longer.
Date Gaps The table below illustrates the steps to be taken in order to correct date gaps
between fitness reports.

Step Action
1 Exhaust all means to locate the RS.
2 Complete section A of a fitness report form with the exception of
items 5 through 8.
3 Send the completed section A attached with cover letter, to the RS
requesting he or she complete the fitness report.
4 The RS must forward the completed report to the CMC (MMSB-
31) or (MMSB-34) and provide a copy to the Marine.
5 If the RS fails to respond within 30 days, forward a copy of the
correspondence originally sent to the RS soliciting the fitness
report and an original fitness report with items 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, and
11 of section A completed to the CMC (MMSB-31) or (MMSB-
34).
6 If you cannot locate the RS, forward an original fitness report with
items 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, and 11 of section A completed to the CMC
(MMSB-31 or MMSB-34). Include in the letter any known
information that may help locate the RS or RO.

Note: Different actions are required based on the length of time:


- If the report is over 1 year old, only the RS signature is
needed.
- If the report is less than 1 year old, RS and RO signature
(certified true copy) of original report are needed.

MCI Course 8101 6-24 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 5 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 The Performance Evaluation Section (PES) of the Personnel Management


Support Branch (MMSB) provides essential data to _____ CMC’s personnel
management responsibilities.

a. enhance
b. influence
c. support
d. maximize

Item 2 Policy and Research Unit (MMSB-31) is responsible for fitness report policy,
research, correction, and accountability for all

a. officers only.
b. reserve Marines.
c. enlisted Marines.
d. active duty personnel.

Item 3 Which of the personnel listed below are authorized to endorse fitness reports
that require administrative corrections?

a. Reporting Senior (RS)


b. Reviewing Officer (RO)
c. Administrative Officer (AO)
d. a and b
e. a, b, and c

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-25 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 To warrant a correction of a date gap, the date gap must be how many days
delinquent?

a. 31 days or longer
b. 31 days or less
c. 30 days or more
d. 30 days or less

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-26 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 c 6-20
2 d 6-20
3 d 6-22
4 a 6-24

MCI Course 8101 6-27 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 6-28 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise


LESSON 3
PERSONNEL RECORD ACCOUNTABILITY AND AUDIT
PROCEDURES
Introduction

Estimated 20 minutes
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson will discuss the importance of conducting an audit for the Basic
Individual Record (BIR) and Basic Training Record (BTR). It will also
discuss the occasions to conduct an audit and action taken to incorporate
changes.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify components of the Basic Individual Record (BIR).

• Identify components of the Basic Training Record (BTR).

• Identify occasions to audit the BIR and BTR.

• Explain action to correct the BIR and BTR.

In This Lesson The lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 6-29
Personnel Records 6-30
Maintaining Personnel Records 6-32
Lesson 3 Exercise 6-34

MCI Course 8101 6-29 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3


Personnel Records

Marine Corps The Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS) is the single, integrated,
Total Force personnel and pay system supporting both active and reserve components of
System the Marine Corps, and personnel management for all Marines. The MCTFS
(MCTFS) maintains more than 500,000 active, reserve and retiree records that are
available to be processed for pay purposes, personnel management, or for the
production of necessary management reports.

Reporting The data collection of the MCTFS is based on the principle of singular
Purposes reporting. An item of information is entered into the system only once;
thereafter, only updates, deletions, or corrections to this information are
reported.

MCTFS The MCTFS central database is maintained by Defense Finance and


Database Accounting Service (DFAS), Kansas City Center and contains all data
elements resident in the MCTFS. Records containing specified data elements
for all military personnel (active and reserve components, to include retirees)
comprise the Central Master File (CMF).

Manpower The Manpower Information System (MIS) encompasses the tasks and
Information functions required to maintain and utilize accurate records in the MCTFS
System (MIS) databases. These tasks and functions include verifying records through the
audit of

• Basic Individual Record (BIR)


• Basic Training Record (BTR)
• Daily Retrieval System (DRS)
• Record of Emergency Data (RED)
• Record of Service (ROS)
• MOS Record (TMOS)
• Education Record (EDU)
• Awards Record (AWDS)
• Career Retirement Credit Report (CRCR)
• Performance Evaluation Record

For the purpose of this lesson, we will discuss audit procedures of the BIR
and BTR, the two most important and comprehensive records in the system.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-30 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3


Personnel Records, Continued

Significance of The BIR and BTR consist of personal information about the individual
BIR and BTR Marine. The significance of these records is that the information is collected
from the initial enlistment to the present. It is important to maintain correct
information. Incorrect information may delay a Marine’s promotion, or deny
benefits to a dependent. For this reason, Marines are required to conduct
audits of their records to prevent this from happening.

Components of The BIR is a listing of administrative information contained in the Central


BIR Master File (CMF) computer record of an individual Marine. The BIR is
used to ensure that certain important data elements in the Marine’s record are
correct. Components of the BIR include the following:

• Header - SSN, Name, Present-Grade, etc.


• Contract - Expiration of Active Service (EAS), Expiration of Current
Contract (ECC), Expiration of Obligated Service (EOS) etc.
• Service – Present Grade Date of Rank, Select Grade/Date, T/O
number/Line number, etc.
• Personal – Date of Birth, Citizenship, Religion, etc.
• Record – Record Status, Reserve Record Status, Disputed Date/Data, etc.
• Dependents – Marital Status, Dependent Certification Code, Service
Spouse SSN, etc.

Components of The format of the BTR is similar to the BIR; components of the BTR include
BTR the following:

• Unit training –scores for the PFT, BST/EST, current rifle qualification,
current pistol qualification, etc.
• Service training – security investigation date/type, level of security
clearance held, place of birth/state/county, etc
• Service schools/Special Skills – service schools code/year, local schools
• Test scores – classification/assignment test-type/date/raw scores, army
radio code, electrical/DP test, foreign language

MCI Course 8101 6-31 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3


Maintaining Personnel Records

Significance Personnel records are the cornerstone of a Marine’s career. These records
give a current in-depth reflection of the Marine. They provide personal and
training information that is crucial when analyzing a Marine’s career for
promotion or retention. This is why it is important to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of these files.

Audit Process Accuracy and completeness of both types of personnel records (audit) can
best be determined through personal interview with the individual Marine.
Therefore, whenever practical, the audit will be conducted during an
interview with the Marine and a designated auditor.

Assigning The Reporting Unit (RU) will designate in writing Marines authorized to
Auditors conduct audits. This designation shall be based upon the auditor’s knowledge
of personnel records and familiarity with the audit process. Designation of
auditors shall not be accomplished based upon billet assignment alone.
Marines in the rank of Lance Corporal and above, and civilian personnel GS-
04 and above may be assigned to conduct audits.

Occasions for Audit occasions are no longer based on the last digit of the Marine’s SSN or,
Audit of BIR for reserve personnel, the anniversary date. The following audit occasions are
and BTR established as the minimum occasions for auditing personnel records.

• Join Process Audit. Whenever joined by a Reporting Unit (RU)


• Triennial Audit. At least once every three years from the date of the last
join process audit or triennial audit
• Mobilization/Deployment Readiness Audit. For a deployment which is
anticipated to be 31 days or more in duration
• Administrative Review. This is required for reserve personnel to include
those individuals serving on the Active Reserve Program or extended
active duty
• Whenever the commander considers that an additional audit is
necessary

The Marine will acknowledge the audit/interview by signing the BIR and
BTR.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-32 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3


Maintaining Personnel Records, Continued

Annotations The audit official will annotate audit items with the correct information
whenever an error is detected. Auditors will also insert information for blank
items and annotate items for which “none” is an appropriate response. If an
item is “not applicable” to the Marine being audited, the auditor will insert
“N/A.”

Corrective Information on the printed BIR/BTR represents data in the Central Master
Action File (CMF). Unit Diary entries will be used to report additions, deletions, and
change missing or erroneous data. Some data cannot be corrected at the RU
level. In this case, the RU will submit a request with supporting
documentation to the required office for corrections.

Filing Status Upon completion of the audit, and after discrepancies have been corrected,
the updated BIR and BTR will be filed in the Service Record Book/Officer
Qualification Record (SRB/OQR).

MCI Course 8101 6-33 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3


Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated 5 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 4 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the following are components of the Basic Individual Record
(BIR)?

a. Name, SSN, EAS, and Record Status


b. SSN, Marital Status, and Current Rifle Qualification
c. Foreign Language, Record Status, and Date of Birth
d. Army Radio Code, Service Spouse SSN, and Name

Item 2 Which of the following are components of the Basic Training Record (BTR)?

a. PFT, Service Schools Code/Year, and Dependent Certification Code


b. BST/EST, Security Clearance Held, Citizenship, and Religion
c. Current Pistol Qualification, Local Schools, and PFT
d. T/O number/Line Number, Date of Birth, and Security Investigation/Type

Item 3 What are the occasions for conducting an audit of the BIR and BTR?

a. Based on the last digit of the Marine’s SSN


b. When a Marine joins a unit and triennially
c. When a Marine reenlists
d. During an annual inspection

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-34 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 To report additions and deletions, and change missing or erroneous data on
the BIR or BTR, __________ entries are made.

a. historical data
b. administrative
c. central master file
d. unit diary

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 6-35 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 6-31
2 c 6-31
3 b 6-32
4 d 6-33

MCI Course 8101 6-36 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise


STUDY UNIT 7
FILES, DIRECTIVES, AND PUBLICATIONS
Overview

Estimated 3 hours, 30 minutes


Study Time

Scope This study unit will familiarize the staff noncommissioned officer (SNCO)
with an overview of the files and directives system. It describes how the files
and directives system works and where these tools are located. As the
resident expert, a SNCO is responsible for accessing and utilizing files and
directives to assist in daily problem solving.

Learning At the end of this study unit, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the requirements of the files and directives system.

• Identify correspondence standards and procedures.

• Identify the procedures for the distribution and maintenance of


publications.

In This Study This study unit contains the following lessons.


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Files and Directives 7-3
Lesson 2 Correspondence 7-21
Lesson 3 Publications 7-55

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-1 Study Unit 7


(This page intentionally left blank)

MCI Course 8101 7-2 Study Unit 7


LESSON 1
FILES AND DIRECTIVES
Introduction

Estimated 1 hour
Study Time

Scope The lesson will familiarize the SNCO with how to use, organize, maintain,
and manage correspondence, files, and directives.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the definition of a file.

• Identify two types of file folders.

• Identify the definition for standard subject identification codes (SSIC).

• Identify the purpose of SECNAVINST 5210.11D.

• Identify the standard subject identification codes code groups.

• Identify the definition of a directive.

• Identify the type of directives.

• Identify the criteria for identifying directives.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page


Introduction 7-3
Files Management System 7-4
Standard Subject Identification Codes (SSIC) 7-6
Directives 7-13
Lesson 1 Exercise 7-17

MCI Course 8101 7-3 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


File Management System

Definition A file is a collection of all correspondence in the form of standard letters,


endorsements, administrative action forms, naval messages, directive, and
other government forms.

File Folders There are two types of folders used to file correspondence.

• Kraft “brown” folder is used for filing correspondence.


• Manila folder is used for routing purposes or as a temporary case file.

Labels Each file folder has three labels:

• File identification label


• Date label
• Disposal action label

File The file identification label is placed in the top left corner of the file folder. It
Identification consists of the Standard Subject Identification code (SSIC) and subject title.
Label
• SSIC identifies the general or specific pieces of correspondence filed
inside the folder (1000-1999).

• Subject title is the corresponding title of the SSIC (MILITARY


PERSONNEL).

Date Label The date label is placed in the top center of the file folder. It records the date
the file was opened and closed.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-4 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


File Management System, Continued

Open Date The opening date for a file is dated the day a file is established.

• All correspondence files, except for those dealing with money (fiscal), are
opened on a calendar year basis, for example: 1 January of each year.

• Files pertaining to “money” or fiscal matters are opened on a fiscal year


basis, for example: 1 October of each year.

Close Date The closing date for a file is dated the day a file is closed.

• Closing dates are normally 31 December for files opened on a calendar


year basis.

• Closing dates are normally 30 September for files opened on a fiscal year
basis.

Expansion Files Expansion files are opened when the

• Files accumulate ten or more pieces of correspondence with the same


SSIC

• Files reach 3/4 of an inch capacity and must be closed

• Open date for that specific SSIC folder reflects the date of the earliest
dated document in the new file

• Open date for a new folder after a closed file reflects the date after the
previous file is closed

Disposal Action The disposal action label is placed in the top right corner of the file folder. It
Label records the retention period, disposal action, and the authority.

MCI Course 8101 7-5 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Standard Subject Identification Codes

Definition A standard subject identification code (SSIC) is a four- or five-digit number


assigned to the subject of a document. Each number within the digit
represents a particular subject category or element. Personnel working with
files, correspondence, and directives most commonly use the acronym SSIC.

Major Subject The Navy’s SSIC system is broken down into 13 major subject groups or
Groups categories. The following table identifies the major subject groups.

Major Subject Groups


• Military Personnel • Ordnance Material
• Telecommunications • Ships Design and Material
• Operations and Readiness • General Material
• Logistics • Facilities and Activities Ashore
• General Administration and • Civilian Personnel
Management • Aeronautical and Astronautical
• Medicine and Dentistry Material
• Financial Management

SECNAVINST Secretary of the Navy Instruction (SECNAVIST) 5210.11D is the Navy’s File
5210.11D Maintenance Procedures and SSIC manual. Its purpose is to revise the
Navy’s SSIC and file maintenance procedures. This instruction outlines the
process for segregating and filing Navy and Marine Corps records and the
single standard system of numbers and or letter symbols. This filing system
is also used throughout the Navy for categorizing the subject classifying Navy
and Marine Corps information.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-6 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued

Designators There are 13 major SSIC groups assigned, content descriptions, and
and Subject numerical designator groups as described in the following table.
Matter

Standard Subject Identification Code Designators and Subject Matter

Designators General Category and Subject Matter


Military Personnel

Subjects relating solely to the administration of military personnel.


1000 - 1999
• The following restrictions apply
• Civilian personnel are included in the 12000 series
• General personnel subjects relating to both civilian and military
personnel are included in the 5000 series
Telecommunications

Subjects relating to
2000 - 2999
• General communication matters
• Communication systems and equipment
Operations and Readiness

Subjects relating to such matters as

• Operational plans
3000 - 3999 • Fleet readiness
• Operational training and readiness
• Warfare techniques
• Operational intelligence
• Research and development
• Geophysical and hydrographic support

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-7 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued

Designators
and Subject
Matter,
continued

Designators General Category and Subject Matter


Logistics

Subjects relating to logistical support of the Navy and Marine Corps


including

• Procurement • Maintenance
4000 - 4999
• Supply control • Construction
• Property redistribution • Conversion
• Disposal • Production
• Travel • Mobilization planning
• Transportation • Foreign military assistance

General Administration and Management

Subjects relating to the administration, organization, and management of the


Department of the Navy, including

5000 - 5999 • General personnel matter (Military and civilian)


• Records management programs
• Security
• External services
• Office automation
• Publication and printing matters
Medicine and Dentistry

Subjects relating to medical matters such

6000 - 6999 • Physical fitness


• General medicine
• Special or preventative medicine
• Dentistry
• Medical equipment and supplies

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-8 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued

Designators
and Subject
Matter,
continued

Designators General Category and Subject Matter


Financial Management

Subjects relating to the financial administration of the Department of the


Navy, including

• Budgeting
7000 - 7999
• Disbursing
• Accounting
• Auditing
• Contract auditing
• Industrial and other special financing matters
• Statistical reporting
Ordnance Material

Subjects relating to all types of ordnance material and weapons including

• Ammunition
• Explosives
8000 - 8999
• Guided missiles of all types
• Nuclear weapons
• Fire control and optics
• Combat vehicles
• Underwater ordnance materials
• Miscellaneous ordnance equipment
Ships Design and Material

Subjects relating to such matters as


9000 - 9999
• The design and characteristics of ships
• Ships material and equipment

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-9 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued

Designators
and Subject
Matter,
continued

Designators General Category and Subject Matter


General Material

Sujects relating to general categories of materials not included in the


specialized material groups. For example

1000 - 10999 • Audiovisual / graphic arts / photographic / television / video


equipment and accessories
• General machinery
• Tools
• Materials personnel
• Miscellaneous categories
Facilities and Activities Ashore

Subjects relating to

• Ashore structures and facilities


11000 - 11999
• Fleet facilities
• Transportation facilities
• Heavy equipment
• Utilities and services
• Other similar subjects
Civilian Personnel
12000 - 12999
Subjects relating solely to the administration of civilian personnel.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-10 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued

Designators
and Subject
Matter,
continued

Designators General Category and Subject Matter


Aeronautical and Astronautical Material
Subjects relating to aeronautical and astronautical material such as

• Parts
• Accessories
• Instruments
13000 - 13999
• Special Devices
• Armament
• Aerological equipment
• Weapons systems
• Types of aircraft
• Astronautical vehicles

Construction The table shows one of the 13 major subject groups broken down into primary,
secondary, and tertiary subdivisions.

5000 Major Subject Group Code


General Administration and
Management
5200 Primary Subject is designated by the
Management Programs and Techniques last three digits of the code number
5210 Secondary Subject is designated by the
Records Management last two digits
5211 Tertiary Subject is designated by the
Filing, Maintenance, Protection, last digit
Retrieval, and Privacy Act Systems

Assignment When a document is created, include the SSIC that closely describes the document’s
subject. Consider the subject, purpose, significance, and the manner in which the
documents are requested.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-11 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Standard Subject Identification Codes, Continued

Numbering The following graphic representation supports SSIC concepts.


System

• Group Category/General Administration and Management


5000
5200 • Management Programs and Techniques
5300 • Manpower/Personnel
5400 • Organizations, Functions, and Status
5500 • Security
5600 • Micrographics Publications, Printing, Duplicating
5700 • External and Internal Relations
5800 • Laws and Legal Matters
5909 • Office Services

5210 • Records Management


5220 • Workload/Performance Measurement
5230 • Automatic Data Processing & Info. Systems
5240 • Industrial Methods
5250 • Management Sciences
5270 • Office Information Systems Management
5280 • Operational Analysis
5290 • Audiovisual
Management

5211 • Filing, Maintenance, Retrieval, and Privacy Act


5212 • Records Disposal Systems
5213 • Forms Management
5214 • Reports Management
5215 • Issuance Systems
5216 • Correspondence Management
5217 • Effective Writing
5218 • Mail Management
5219 • Publications Management

MCI Course 8101 7-12 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Directives

Definition A directive is a formal written communication from the unit commander that

• Establishes or revises policy


• Delegates authority or assigns responsibility
• Assigns a mission, function, or task
• Issues plans or programs
• Directs courses of action or conduct
• Regulates administrative practices
• Establishes a procedure, standard, or method of performing a duty,
function, or task
• Modifies, changes, or cancels another directive

Directive In accordance with MCO 5215.1H, Marine Corps Directives, HQMC staff
Formats agencies and authorized field commanders shall write directives in the “Five
Paragraph Order format,” wherever and whenever feasible, to adhere to the
Commandant’s Policy memorandum number 3-00 dated 25 June 2000. This
policy memorandum is an enclosure in MCO 5215.1H.

Types of The different types of directive are


Directives
• Orders
• Bulletins
• Messages

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-13 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Directives, Continued

Orders Orders are directives of continuing authority or reference value. It is directed


at overall functions and is effective for 9 years unless it is superseded or
canceled. An order is assigned a consecutive point number that follows the
SSIC. There are two types of orders, letter-type and manual-type.

Letter-Type Letter-type is an instruction or notice prepared in a format similar to that of


the naval letter. It may contain a cancellation date to reduce its effective
period to less than 9 years.

Manual-Type Manual-type is referred to frequently; it has a promulgation page, a change


page, and a locator page. In addition to a consecutive point number following
the SSIC, the letter “P” will precede the SSIC of a manual-type order.

Bulletins Bulletins are directives with the same force and effect as an order. It is used
to publish material that is either primarily informative or otherwise directive
in nature. Bulletins are not of a continuing authority or reference; it has a
self-cancellation date, which limits its effectiveness to one year.

Messages Message directives are used when promulgation and transmittal of an order,
bulletin, or change to either is so urgent that it must be disseminated through
the Naval Telecommunications System (radio teletype). An example is the
All Marine (ALMAR) message.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-14 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Directives, Continued

Identification of Orders are identified by the following criteria:


Orders
• The originating echelon of command is abbreviated. For example,
Headquarters Marine Corps is MC, battalion is Bn, regiment is Regt.

• The letter “O” follows the issuing command to distinguish an order from a
bulletin. For example, MCO, BnO, RegtO.

• A “P” may follow next to indicate that the directive is a manual-type order
instead of a letter-type order.

• A directive classified as confidential will have a zero “0” preceding the


SSIC code. Directives classified, as secret will have a double zero “00”
preceding the SSIC code. For example, MCOP0 or MCOP00.

• Every order is assigned a four- or five-digit SSIC code that identifies the
primary focus of the directive.

• An “R” after the SSIC indicates that the directive is applicable only to the
Marine Corps Reserves. For example, MCO P1070R.2.

• Consecutive point numbers are assigned to distinguish between orders


issued by the same echelon of command with the same SSIC. These
numbers follow the SSIC code or the reserve designation.

Identification of The criteria for identifying bulletins is similar to those for orders. Listed
Bulletins below are identifying criteria for bulletins.

• The originating echelon of command is abbreviate.


• “Bul,” follows the abbreviated echelon of command to designate the
directive a bulletin.
• A “0” or “00” preceding the SSIC indicates if the bulletin is classified.
• The assigned SSIC code is determined by the subject matter.
• An “R” designates as applicable to only the reserve.
• Bulletins are not issued a consecutive point number, but are given an
issued date. For example, MCBul 01210R of 7 April 02.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-15 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Directives, Continued

Identification of Message directives are identified by serial numbers assigned throughout a


Messages calendar year by HQMC. The most common message directives are
addressed to all Marines worldwide (ALMAR). For example ALMAR 20/02
would identify the 20th ALMAR message directive issued in 2002.

Message directives are prepared in accordance with the Naval Tele-


communications Publication. Directives issued by commands other than
HQMC and HQMC issued directives other than ALMARs are identified by
the issuing command Date-Time Group (DTG). For example, a DTG of a
message directive issued by the First Marine Air Wing on 31 Mar 02 at 1200
would look like this, “FIRST MAW CAMP BUTLER JA, 311200Z MAR 02.

MCI Course 8101 7-16 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Direction Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is a file?

a. A collection of folders and correspondence in a square metal casing


b. A collection of all correspondence in the form of standard letters
c. A collection of objects in a row
d. A tool of hardened steel with cutting ridges for forming or smoothing

Item 2 Which type of folder is used to establish a correspondence file?

a. Manila
b. Pocket
c. Kraft
d. Sectional

Item 3 What does the acronym SSIC mean?

a. Standard Subject Identification Codes


b. Subject Source Identification Codes
c. Simple Standard Identification Codes
d. Standard Summary Identification Codes

Item 4 The purpose of SECNAVINST 5210.11D is to

a. identify files and directives used in the department of the Navy.


b. ensure the accurate designation of files and directives within the
department of the Navy.
c. standardize the Naval correspondence and file maintenance procedures.
d. revise the department of the Navy SSICs and department of the Navy file
maintenance procedures.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-17 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 5 What is the general category for designator 2000-2999?

a. General Administration and Management


b. Telecommunications
c. Ordnance Material
d. Operations and Readiness

Item 6 A directive is a formal written communication from the unit commander that

a. regulates administrative practices.


b. informs the public.
c. protects the property.
d. designs structures and policy.

Item 7 The different types of directives are orders, bulletins, and

a. memorandums.
b. letters.
c. messages.
d. endorsements.

Item 8 Which item is one of the identifying criteria for an order?

a. The letter “S” after the SSIC indicating a classification of “secret”


b. An issued date
c. A cancellation date
d. The letter “R” indicates as applicable to the reserves only

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-18 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Solutions The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page


1 b 7-4
2 c 7-4
3 a 7-6
4 d 7-6
5 b 7-7
6 a 7-13
7 c 7-13
8 d 7-15

MCI Course 8101 7-19 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 7-20 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise


LESSON 2
CORRESPONDENCE
Introduction

Estimated 1 hour, 15 minutes


Study Time

Scope This lesson is designed to familiarize the staff noncommissioned officer


(SNCO) with correspondence standards, procedures, and formats.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the definition of correspondence.

• Identify the purpose of SECNAVINST 5216.5D.

• Identify the guidelines for writing correspondence.

• Identify the types of correspondence formats.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page


Introduction 7-21
Naval Correspondence 7-22
Paragraphs 7-23
Standard Letters 7-26
Multiple Address Letters 7-34
Endorsements 7-38
Memorandums 7-41
Point Papers 7-45
Business Letters 7-47
Lesson 2 Exercise 7-51

MCI Course 8101 7-21 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Naval Correspondence

Overview The Navy Department uses various types of correspondence for an array of
administrative and operational tasks. The SNCO will experience an increased
administrative responsibility over a broad spectrum of operational and
organizational tasks.

Definition Correspondence refers to the types of communications used to transmit


written ideas and messages. The types of correspondence include letters,
postcards, memoranda, notes, telecommunications, and any other form of
addressed, written communications sent or received. Naval correspondence is
the term often used by Navy and Marine Corps personnel to describe
correspondence used within the respective organizations.

SECNAVINST Secretary of the Navy Instruction 5216.5D is the Navy Correspondence


5216.5D manual. It prescribes uniform standards for the management and preparation
of correspondence.

Writing The tone, quality, and responsiveness of correspondence is important. The


Guidelines command’s image and effectiveness is impaired if written correspondence is
sloppy, difficult to understand, unresponsive, cold, impersonal, or incomplete.
Correspondence should incorporate

• Neat appearance
• Correct format
• Organized and rational flow of information to adequately support or
discuss a topic, view, or proposal
• Concise and easy to understand language
• Error free writing
• Grammatically correct writing
• Neutral gender without detracting from the intent of the document
• Other means of communication when necessary
• A point of contact and return phone number when a reply may be
necessary
• Automated office equipment to increase efficiency; i.e. facsimile machine
and other electronic advances

MCI Course 8101 7-22 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Paragraphs

Introduction Writing professional correspondence and developing presentations requires


the author to write, meeting the organizational expectation. The Marine
Corps generally uses brief and concise statements to communicate
information. Paragraph content and format are the essential building blocks
used to develop documents for professional correspondence.

Content Content is the information contained within a paragraph. It should be


organized in a logical manner that allows the paragraph to project a concept,
point of view, or idea.

Parts of a A paragraph has three parts:


Paragraph
• Topic sentence
• Supporting details
• Closing sentence

Topic Sentence The topic sentence is the first sentence in a paragraph. It introduces the main
idea of the paragraph.

Supporting Supporting details come after the topic sentence. They give details to develop
Details and support the main idea of the paragraph.

Closing The closing sentence is the last sentence in a paragraph. It restates the main
Sentence idea of the paragraph using different words.

Format Standard paragraph formatting is used to keep the document organized and
neat, and increases understanding.

Identifying Main paragraphs are numbered in sequence 1, 2 ,3, etc. Subparagraphs are
Paragraphs and identified in the following sequence: a., (1), (a), (1), (a). Indent each new
Subparagraphs subparagraph by four spaces and start typing on the fifth space. Single space
within main paragraphs and subparagraphs and double space between them.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-23 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Paragraphs, Continued

Limits Subparagraphs clearly display levels of importance and encourage the use of
Subparagraphs lists for easy reading. They clutter writing when carried too far.
Subparagraphs should not divide past the second level, (a), until all
reparagraphing alternatives have been used first. As illustrated in the
paragraph formatting diagram on page 7-25.

Headings Use brief but informative paragraph headings in long correspondence with
widely varying topics. Underline any heading and capitalize its key words.
Be consistent across main paragraphs and subparagraphs; if paragraph 1 has a
heading, paragraph 2 would need a heading; if 1a has a heading, 1b would
need a heading.

Citing When referencing a paragraph or subparagraph, write the numbers and letters
without period or spaces, for example 2b(4)(a).

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-24 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Paragraphs, Continued

Paragraph The illustration below is an example of paragraph and subparagraph


Formatting formatting.

1.**Numbering for main paragraph.


%
2. If subparagraphs are needed, use at least two; e.g., a (1) must have a (2).
%
****a. Indent each new subdivision four spaces and start typing at the fifth space.
%
****b.**Text.
%
*********(1)*Documents rarely require subdividing to the extent shown below.
%
*********(2)*Text.
%
*************(a)*Do not subparagraph past this level until you have exhausted all
reparagraphing.
%
*************(b)*Text.
%
*****************1.**Text.
%
*********************a.**Text.
%
*************************(1)*Text.
%
***************************** (a)*Never subparagraph beyond this level.
%
***************************** (b)*Text.
%
*************************(2)*Text.
%
*********************b.**Text.
%
*****************2.**Text.
%
10.**When using two digits, continue to indent each new subdivision four spaces and
start typing on the fifth space (paragraphs will not line up).
%
**** a.**Text.
%
********* (9)*Text.
%
********* (10)*Text.
%
*************** (a) Text.
%
*************** (b) Text.
%
********* (11)*Text.
%
**** b.**Text.
%
11 NOTE: * An asterisk (*) indicates a single blank space.
% A percent sign (%) indicates a single blank line.

MCI Course 8101 7-25 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Standard Letters

General The format of the standard letter, with slight variations, sets the pattern for
joint letters, multiple address letters, endorsements, directives, and
memoranda. The standard letter is used to correspond officially with
addressees within the Department of Defense (DoD). It may be used when
writing to addressees outside DoD only if they have adopted this format.

Standard When drafting a standard letter, the author should pay attention to the
Letter Format following format guidelines, which correspond to the format on the preceding
Guidelines page. While the naval correspondence was written for use with a typewriter,
the author will have to adjust the formats for use with a personal computer
(PC). The table below explains the guidelines to use for each item in a
standard letter. The numbers on each item correspond to the diagram on
page 7-29.

Item Guideline
Margins are set at 1 inch from the top, bottom, and sides of
each page. The exceptions to this are on letterhead paper,
typing starts more than 1 inch from the top when the
(1) letterhead is printed and less if it is typed. Typing may end
Margins more than 1 inch from the bottom that has a signature.
Computer applications require the top margin to be set at ½
inch. Do not right justify margins or use proportional
spacing.
Whether typing or stamping a letterhead, begin with
(2) “UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS,” centered on the
Letterhead fourth line from the top of the page. Center the activity’s
name, address, and nine-digit zip code on succeeding lines.
If “in reply refer to,” is printed on the activity’s letterhead
paper, type the SSIC on the next line. If “in reply refer to,”
is not printed, type the SSIC on the second line below the
(3) letterhead, starting 2 inches or more from the right edge of
Identification the paper. There are three parts of the identification
Symbols symbols:

• Standard Subject Identification Code (SSIC)


• Originator’s code (with or without serial numbers)
• Date (typed in day-month-year order without
punctuation)

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-26 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Standard Letters, Continued

Standard
Letter Format
Guidelines,
continued

Item Guideline
The “From:” line identifies the originator’s title, name and
(4) location of the command (without the state or zip code). Type
“From:” “From:”, at the left margin on the second line below the date
Line line. Two spaces follow the colon, and continuation lines start
under the first word after the heading. A comma separates the
title of the originator from the title of the command.
The “To:” line identifies the recipients of the document. Type
“To:” at the left margin on the first line under the “From:” line
(don’t skip a line). Four spaces follow the colon, and
continuation lines start under the first word after the heading.
(5)
“To:” and The “Via:” line is used when one or more commands outside
“Via:” Lines your own should see a letter before it reaches the action
addressee. Type the “Via:” at the left margin on the first line
below the “To:” line. Three spaces follow the colon, and
continuation lines start under the first word after the heading.
Number “Via:” addresses if you list two or more.
The subject line consists of a sentence fragment that tells
readers what the letter is about (no more than 10 words).
(6) Phrase the subject to make it genuinely informative and
Subject Line capitalize every letter after the colon. Type “Subj:” at the left
margin on the second line under the last line of the previous
heading. Two spaces follow the colon.
The reference line identifies any resources the document cites
or uses in the content. Type “Ref:” at the left margin on the
(7) second line below the subject line. Use a lowercase letter
Reference (beginning with the letter a) in parentheses before the
Line description of every reference. Three spaces follow the colon,
and one space follows the closing parentheses. Continuation
lines start under the first word after the heading.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-27 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Standard Letters, Continued

Standard
Letter Format
Guidelines,
continued

Item Guideline
Enclosures are listed in the order they appear in the text. Type
(8) “Encl:”, at the left margin on the second line below the last
Enclosure line of the previous heading. Use a number in parentheses
Line (beginning with the number 1) before the description of every
enclosure. Two spaces follow the colon, and one space
follows the closing parenthesis. Continuation lines start under
the first word after the heading.
(9) Skip a line before starting the text. Paragraphs should be
Text formatted as described in the Paragraph and Subparagraph
Formatting section of this lesson.
(10) The right, left, and bottom margins should be one (1) inch.
Margin

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-28 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Standard Letters, Continued

Standard The illustration below is an example of the standard letter format.


Letter
1 %
2 % 1
3 %
4 UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS 2
NAME OF ACTIVITY
ADDRESS
LOCATION, STATE 12345-1234 3
1 %
2 SSIC
Code/Serial
Date
]
1 %
2 From:**Title of activity head, name of activity, location when needed 4
To: ****Title of activity, name of activity, location when needed (Code)

1 %
Via: ****(1) Title of activity head location when needed (Code)
********(2) Pattern of line (1) repeated for next endorser ] 5

2 Subj:** NORMAL WORD ORDER WITH ALL LETTERS CAPITALIZED 6


1 %
2 Ref: ***(a)*Communication or Document that gears directly on the subject at
hand
] 7

1 %
2

1 %
Encl: ** (1)*Title of material enclosed with letter
(2)*Title of material separately (sep. cover) ] 8

2 1. This example shows the first page of a two page standard letter. We have used 9
many of the elements that might appear on a standard letter. Mention reference (a)
and enclosures (1) and (2) in the text.
1 %
2 2.**Start the “From:” line on the second line below the date line. The date may be
typed or stamped in date, month, and last two year digit format.
%
3.**Arrange paragraphs as shown in Drafting Correspondence section.
1 %
2 ****a.**Do not start a paragraph at the bottom of a page unless you can carry at least
two lines over to another page.
%
****b.**Do not number the first page; number only second and later pages.
%
****c.**Other full-page examples in this chapter and later ones shoe the spacing to
correspondence that variously omits “Via:,” “Ref:,” and “Encl:” lines.

1” Margin 1” Margin

10 10
NOTE: * An asterisk (*) indicates a single blank space.
A percent sign (%) indicates a single blank line.

1” Margin Minimum
10

Continued on next page


MCI Course 8101 7-29 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2
Standard Letters, Continued

Second and Second pages are typed in the following format:


Later Pages
• Start typing at the left margin on the sixth line from the top of the page.

• Repeat the subject line as it appears on the first page. Type text on the
second line below the subject.

• Standard letters do not use complementary closes, for example, Sincerely,


or With Regards).

• The signature block starts at the center of the page on the fourth line below
the text.

• The “Copy to” block lists the addresses outside your command that need to
know a letter’s content but don’t need to act on it. Type, “Copy to,” at the
left margin on the second line below the signature block.

• The “Blind Copy to:” block is used to show internal distribution. This is
printed on internal copies, never on the original document. Type “Blind
Copy to:” at the left margin on the second line below the previous block.

• The drafter’s identification is typed on the first or last page of the file copy.

• This includes the name of the writer, writer’s office code, writer’s phone
extension or room number, typist’s identification, date of typing, and word
processing symbols.

• Page numbers are centered ½ inch from the bottom of the page starting with
the number 2. Single page letters and the first page of multiple-page letters
are not numbered.

An example of the format for second pages is on the next page.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-30 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Standard Letters, Continued

Standard The illustration below is an example of a standard letter page 2 format.


Letter Page 2
1 %
2 %
3 %
4 %
5 %
6 SUBJECT BLOCK
1 %
2 ****d.**Second and succeeding pages of a standard letter look like this:
1 %
2 ********(1)*Start typing on the sixth line. Repeat the subject line.
1
2 ********(2) Start the text on the second line below the date or subject line.
%
%
4.**”Copy to:” addresses appear on all copies. “Blind copy to:” addresses as
well as the identity of the writer and typist appear on internal copies only.
%
5.**A standard letter uses no complimentary close.
1
2
%
% ]
3 %
4 NAME OF SIGNER

1
%
%
By Direction
]
2 Copy to:
SNDL number and/or short title of information addressee

1
2
SNDL number and/or short title of information addressee
%
Blind Copy to:
]
1
2
List blind copy addresses
% ]
Writer: Name, organization, room # or telephone #
Typist: Name, date, word processing symbols
]

1” Margin 1” Margin

1” Margin Minimum

½” from bottom and centered

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-31 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Standard Letters, Continued

Standard The illustration below is an example of a standard letter with classification


Letter With markings.
Classification
Markings

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-32 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Standard Letters, Continued

Second Page of The illustration below is an example of the second page of a standard letter
Standard with classification markings.
Letter With
Classification
Markings

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-33 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Multiple Address Letters

.
General Multiple address letters are used when you have more than one addressee.
The multiple address letter has the same format as the standard letter, except
in handling addressees. There are three ways to list addresses:

• “To:” line only


• “Distribution:’ block only
• Both the “To:” line and “Distribution:” block

“To:” Line Use the “To:” line only if you have four addresses or less.

“Distribution” Use the “Distribution:” block when you have more than four addressees.
Block

“To:” Line and Use both the “To:” line and “Distribution:” block in the same letter when you
“Distribution:” show a group title whose distribution is unknown
Block

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-34 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Multiple Address Letters, Continued

Multiple- The illustration below is an example of a multiple address letter using the
Address Letter “To:".
Using “To:”
Line

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-35 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Multiple Address Letters, Continued

Multiple- The illustration below is an example of a multiple address letter using a


Address Letter “Distribution:” block.
Using a
“Distribution:”
Block

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-36 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Multiple Address Letters, Continued

Multiple- The illustration below is an example of a multiple-address letter using a “To:”


Address Letters line and a “Distribution:” block.
Using a “To:”
Line and a
“Distribution:”
Block

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-37 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Endorsements

General When a letter is transmitted “Via:” your command, use an endorsement to


forward comments, recommendations, or information. Start the endorsement
number line at the left margin on the second line below the date line. If the
correspondence is classified, start on the second line below the line carrying
this designation.

Endorsements There are two types of endorsements:

• Same-page
• New-page

The length of the endorsement and the amount of space available determines
which type is used.

Number Each endorsement is numbered in the sequence in which it is added to the


Sequence basic letter. Indicate the numbers of the endorsement by using ordinal
numbers such as FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, followed by typing
“Endorsement on” and identify the basic letter using the same style as a
reference line.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-38 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Endorsements, Continued

Same Page The illustration below is an example of a same-page endorsement.


Endorsement

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-39 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Endorsements, Continued

New-Page The illustration is an example of a new-page endorsement.


Endorsement

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-40 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Memorandums

Definition Memorandums are used as informal ways to correspond within a command or


between Department of the Navy activities. Subordinate commands may use
it to correspond directly with each other on routine official business.

Formats There are seven memorandum formats to choose from that suit different
subjects, occasions, and audiences.

• Memorandum For the Record (MFR)


• “From-To” Memorandum
• Plain-paper Memorandum
• Letterhead Memorandum
• “Memorandum For” Memorandum
• Memorandum of Agreement
• Memorandum of Understanding

Memorandum The MFR is as internal document used to record supporting information in the
For The Record record that is not recorded elsewhere.

“From-To” The “from-to” memorandum may be directed to one or more addressees. If


Memorandum very informal, it may be handwritten.

Plain-Paper Plain-paper memorandums are used for informal communications within a


Memorandum command. It is no more formal than the memorandum form, but it is more
flexible when there are multiple addressees, via addressees or both.

Letterhead Letterhead memoranda are used when direct liaison with individuals outside
Memorandum of your command is authorized, the letterhead memorandum may be used to
correspond on routine matters that neither make a commitment nor take an
official stand.

“Memorandum The “memorandum for” is the most formal memorandum. It is used for
For” communications between high level officials such as the Secretary of
Memorandum Defense, the Secretary of the Navy, and Assistant Secretaries. It is prepared
on letterhead stationary and follows standard letter practice.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-41 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Memorandums, Continued

Memorandum The memorandum of agreements may be used to document mutual


of Agreement agreements of facts, intentions, procedures, limits on future actions, and areas
or of present or future coordination, or commitments.
Understanding

Examples The following illustrations are some examples of the different memorandum
formats. The illustration below is an example of a memorandum for the
record.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-42 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Memorandums, Continued

Plain-Paper The illustration below is an example of a plain-paper memorandum.


“From-To”
Memorandum

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-43 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Memorandums, Continued

Letterhead The illustration below is an example of a letterhead memorandum.


Memorandum

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-44 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Point Papers

Point (Talking) Point papers are referred to as “talking papers.” They provide a standalone
Papers document that presents the essential elements of a subject. It serves as a
readily available source of condensed, factual information on topical subjects.

Format The point paper’s format is very specific to provide uniformity throughout the
Navy Department. The paper is confined to a single 8 ½by 11-inch page.
Allow 1-inch margins for the top, bottom and sides. If unable to get the entire
text on one page, margins may be adjusted to accommodate the entire text on
one page. Eliminate unnecessary words like “the” and “that.”

Section The section headers and paragraphs will be written in the following format:
Headers And
Paragraphs • The paper will have a title of point paper.

• Each section will begin with a header for example: Background,


Discussion, Recommendation.

• Headers are centered on the page and typed in all capital letters.

• Double space between paragraphs and bullets.

• Put main points first with supporting information following. Use short
phrases and bullets.

• Indent subordinate points in cascading style.

• Continuation lines start directly under the first word of the paragraph.

• Data should be presented in graphics rather than words when possible.

• Abbreviations and acronyms may be used if spelled out on initial use.

• Technical terms, phrases, and code names should be explained in plain


language.

• Classification markings must be included on the page except when paper


is unclassified.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-45 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Point Papers, Continued

Point (Talking) The illustration below is an example of a point (talking) paper.


Paper Example

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-46 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Business Letters

Description Business letters are used to correspond with agencies, businesses, or


individuals outside the Department of Defense (DoD), who are not familiar
with the standard letter. It may also be used for official correspondence
between individuals within DoD, when the occasion calls for a personal
approach.

Margins Adjust margins from 1 to 2 inches to achieve maximum balance; never use
less than a 1-inch margin.

Parts of a A business letter is formatted differently than in the standard letter. Listed
Business Letter below are the parts of a business letter. The numbers on each item
correspond to the diagram on page 7-49.

Part Description
The following three symbols are written in the upper right
(1) corner of the letter:
Identification Symbols
• SSIC
• Originator’s code
• Date (written in month-day-year order)
(2) Placed 2 to 8 lines below the date, blocked and flush with
Inside Address the left margin.
An optional line used to direct the letter to a business in
general and to bring it to the attention of a particular person
(3) or department. Start typing two lines below the inside
Attention Line address, block and flush with the left margin, and two lines
above the salutation line.
(4) Capitalize the first letter of the first word of the salutation
Salutation Line as well as the first letter of the addressee’s courtesy title
and surname such as, Dear Mr.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-47 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Business Letters, Continued

Parts of a
Business Letter,
continued

Part Description
Use of the subject line is optional and may replace the
(5) salutation. The subject line should be very brief and to the
Subject Line point with more than one line in length. Capitalize all letters
of the subject line.
Single-space within paragraphs and double-space between
paragraphs. Indent main paragraphs four spaces and start
(6) typing on the fifth space. Do not number main paragraphs.
Body of the Letter The first lines of subparagraphs should be indented, lettered,
or numbered in standard letter fashion.

(7) The right, left, and bottom margins should be one (1) inch.
Margin
Use “sincerely” followed by a comma for the
(8) complimentary close of a business letter. Start the
Complimentary Close complimentary close at the center of the page on the second
line below the text.
(9) Start all lines of the “signature” block at the center of the
Signature Block page, beginning on the fourth line below “sincerely.”
Type “enclosure:” on the second line below the “signature”
(10) block, number and describe them briefly.
Enclosure Note: References and enclosures are addressed in the body
of the letter.
(11) When an enclosure is to be sent separately, type “Separate
Separate Mailing Mailing:” and a brief description.
(12) Type “Copy To:” at the left margin on the second line below
Copy To Line the enclosure line if any, or the signature block.

Identifying Repeat the identification symbols, from the first page, on the sixth line from
Second and the top at the right margin. Continue the text beginning on the second line
Succeeding below the identification symbols.
Pages

Numbering Single-page letters or the first page of a multiple-page letter are not
Pages numbered. Center page numbers ½inch from the bottom of the page, starting
with the number 2. No punctuation accompanies a page number.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-48 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Business Letters, Continued

Two Page The illustration below is an example of the first page of a business letter.
Business Letter
(1st Page)

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-49 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Business Letters, Continued

Two Page The illustration below is an example of the second page of a business letter.
Business Letter
(2nd Page)

MCI Course 8101 7-50 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Direction Complete items 1 through 10 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson

Item 1 What is the definition of correspondence?

a. The types of communications used to transmit written ideas and messages


b. Any type of communication used to transmit an idea or message
c. The types of communications used to transmit verbal ideas and messages
d. Any idea or message used for communication

Item 2 The purpose of SECNAVINST 5216.5D is to

a. establish policy and procedures for submitting correspondence.


b. prescribe uniform standards for the management and preparations
correspondence.
c. prescribe dates and timelines for transmitting correspondence.
d. prescribe the amount of correspondence allowed within a command.

Item 3 Which is a guideline for writing correspondence?

a. Specific gender identification


b. Block paragraphs with left justification
c. Optional point of contact and return phone number
d. Correct format

Item 4 Which item is a part of a paragraph?

a. Salutation
b. Supporting details
c. Introduction
d. Verbal bridge

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-51 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 5 Which item is part of the identification symbols in a standard letter?

a. Originator’s code
b. Reporting Unit code
c. Individual Activity code
d. Local Area code

Item 6 Which item is one of the three ways to list addressees on a multiple address
letter?

a. “Greetings” line
b. “Salutations” line
c. “Distribution” block
d. “Enclosure” block

Item 7 Which item is one of the types of endorsements?

a. Double-page
b. Second-page
c. Half-page
d. New-page

Item 8 Which item is one of the memorandum formats?

a. “Memorandum For” memorandum


b. “Memorandum To The Files” memorandum
c. “Memorandum of Misunderstanding” memorandum
d. “Memorandum For All” memorandum

Item 9 How are headers placed and typed in a point paper?

a. Aligned to the left of the page and typed in capital and lower case letters
b. Centered on the page and typed in all capital letters
c. Indented five spaces on the page and typed in all lower case letters
d. Centered on the page and typed in capital and lower case letters

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-52 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 10 The purpose of a business letter is to

a. correspond with other federal government agencies.


b. correspond with government agencies outside the Marine Corps.
c. correspond with Marine Corps subordinate commands.
d. correspond with agencies and businesses outside DoD.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-53 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page


1 a 7-22
2 b 7-22
3 d 7-22
4 b 7-23
5 a 7-26
6 c 7-34
7 d 7-38
8 a 7-41
9 b 7-45
10 d 7-47

MCI Course 8101 7-54 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise


LESSON 3
PUBLICATIONS
Introduction

Estimated 45 minutes
Study Time

Scope This lesson will familiarize the staff noncommissioned officer (SNCO) with
the procedures for distribution, maintenance, and the status of doctrinal
publications within the Marine Corps Doctrinal publications program to
include service, multi-service, joint, multinational, and associated
publications.

Learning At the end of this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the types of publications.

• Identify where to obtain electronic copies of publications.

• Identify how to requisition publications.

• Identify how to maintain publications.

• Identify the Marine Corps Publication and Distribution System (MCPDs).

• Identify the functions of the Directives Control Point (DCP).

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-55 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page


Introduction 7-55
Types of Publications 7-57
Electronic Distribution of Publications 7-61
Requisition 7-62
Maintenance 7-63
Directives Control Point (DCP) 7-64
Lesson 3 Exercise 7-66

MCI Course 8101 7-56 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Types of Publications

General The Marine Corps publication hierarchy is comprised of Marine Corps


Service doctrinal publications, dual-designated publications, and multi-
service designated publications.

Marine Corps Marine Corps Service doctrine consists of publications created to describe the
Service warfighting doctrine, tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) of the Marine
Doctrine Corps. The Fleet Marine Force Manuals (FMFM), Fleet Marine Force
Reference Publications (FMRP), and Operational Handbooks (OH) are being
phased out as doctrinal publications. These publications are being revised,
rewritten, and designated as one of the following:

• Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications (MCDP)


• Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWP)
• Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRP)

MCDP MCDPs are higher order doctrine publications containing the fundamental
and enduring beliefs of warfighting (capstone) and the guiding doctrine for
the conduct of major warfighting activities (keystone). MCDPs supersede
selected FMFMs. The table below lists the currently published MCDPs.

Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications


Capstone Publications Keystone Publications
MCDP 1 Warfighting MCDP 1-0 Marine Corps
Operations
MCDP 1-1 Strategy MCDP 1-0.1 Componency
MCDP 1-2 Campaigning MCDP 2 Intelligence
MCDP 1-3 Tactics MCDP 3 Expeditionary
Operations
MCDP 4 Logistics
MCDP 5 Planning
MCDP 6 Command and
Control

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-57 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Types of Publications, Continued

MCWP MCWPs have a narrower focus detailing TTP used in the prosecution of war
and other assigned tasks. MCWPs supersede FMFMs, FMFRPs, and OHs.
The table below lists some examples of MCWPs.

Marine Corps Warfighting Publication


MCWP 2-1 Intelligence Operations
MCWP 3-0 Training Series
MCWP 3-1 Ground Combat Operations (FMFM 6)
MCWP 3-2 Aviation Operations (FMFM 5-1)
MCWP 3-3 Type Operations Series
MCWP 3-4 MAGTF Operations Series
MCWP 4-1 Logistics Operations (FMFM 4-1)
MCWP 5-1 Marine Corps Planning Process
MCWP 6-1 Command Series

MCRP MCRPs contain general reference and historical material and more specific
and detailed TTP than MCWPs. MCRPs are given the same number as the
parent MCWP with an alpha designator added to the number. MCRPs
supersede FMFRPs and OHs. The table below list some examples of
MCRPs.

Marine Corps Reference Publications


MCRP 2-15.3B Reconnaissance Reports Guide
MCRP 3-0A Unit Training Management Guide
MCRP 3-11.1A Commander’s Tactical Handbook
MCRP 4-11C Combat Cargo Operations Handbook
MCRP 5-1A Doctrine References For Expeditionary Maneuver
Warfare
MCRP 6-11B Discussion Guide For Marine Corps Values

Dual- Each military service is authorized to use other service’s doctrinal


Designated And publications and to effect necessary modifications to align each with their
Multi-Service own mission, roles, and functions. These publications identified as dual-
Publications designated or multi-service publications, contain TTP that two or more
services use. Every publication must be approved by and bear the designation
of each participating military service. Publications approved by the Marine
Corps are designated as MCWPs or MCRPs.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-58 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Types of Publications, Continued

Air, Land, Sea The ALSA center is chartered by the four service’s doctrine commands and
Application tasked to rapidly develop publications that fill interoperability voids between
(ALSA) services, joint forces, and staffs. These publications take on the form of
Publications multi-service TTP (MTTP) and address operational details often not included
in our joint publications. Upon approval, ALSA publication are given an
MCWP or MCRP designator and placed into the Marine Corps’ publication
hierarchy.

Naval Doctrine These publications provide the fundamental concepts that govern the
Publications employment of Naval forces at all levels. They form the seamless fusion of
Navy and Marine Corps doctrine, and form the naval characteristic of joint
operations.

Joint These publications are developed by the Joint Chiefs of Staff and are
Publications promulgated as a distinct family of publications. Joint publications (JP) and
Joint TTPs (JTTP) provide guidelines for the coordinated employment of
forces from two or more military departments conducting joint operations.
Listed in the table below are some examples of joint publications and joint
TTP:

Joint Publications/Joint TTPs


JP 3-02 Joint Doctrine for Amphibious Operations
JP 3-02.1 Joint Doctrine for Landing Force Operations
JP 3-07.5 JTTP for Noncombatant Evacuation Operations (NEO)
JP 3-09.3 JTTP for Close Air Support (CAS)
JP 4-02.1 Public Affairs in Joint Operations
JP 4-06 JTTP for Shipboard Helicopter Operations

Joint Munitions JMEMs provide in-depth descriptions of specific weapon system


Effectiveness characteristics and effectiveness. JMEMs are reference documents detailing
Manuals friendly weapon system capabilities and limitations, and are primarily used
(JMEM) for weaponeering. JMEMs are designated as MCRPs but are not posted in the
doctrine hierarchy.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-59 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Types of Publications, Continued

Technical Official documents used by the Marine Corps that support material and
Publications equipment are called Technical publications.

Approved Approved allied publications contain doctrine and TTP that the North Atlantic
Allied Treaty Organization (NATO) member nations have subscribed. When
Publications approved by the United States, these publications are the senior doctrinal
guide for forces conducting NATO operations.

“Other” The Army, Navy, and Air Force have produced a large number of
Service publications detailing TTPs for the many aspects of warfighting. Though not
Publications Marine Corps doctrine, these publications provide a wealth of information,
and can be referenced to supplement Marine Corps TTP.

MCI Course 8101 7-60 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Electronic Distribution Of Publications

Purpose To provide information on the electronic distribution of doctrinal


publications. The Doctrine Division has developed an internet website to
supplement and enhance the Marine Corps Publications Distribution System
(MCPDS). The website provides electronic copies of current and draft
doctrinal publications. Paper copies of doctrinal publications will still be
available for ordering and distribution.

USMC Internet The Marine Corps has developed an official website that lists unclassified
Website publications, orders, directives, and technical publications. You can access
this website at (http://www.usmc.mil)

This website is open to internet users, however the technical publication site
is restricted to military personnel only.

Doctrine The Doctrine Division has developed a NIPRNET (Non-secure Internet


Division Protocol Routed Network) and SIPRNET (Secure Internet Protocol Routed
Internet Network) for hosting both unclassified and classified doctrinal publications.
Website They are:

• (https://www.doctrine.usmc.mil) NIPRNET unclassified publications


• (http://www.doctrine.mccdc.usmc.smil.mil) SIPRNET classified
publications

Other Websites Listed below are some joint and other service websites that can be used to
access publications:

• Joint Publication (http://www.dtic.mil/doctrine)


• Multi-Service Publications (http://www.dtic.mil/alsa)
• Air Force Publications (http://www.doctrine.af.mil/atdls/htm)
• Army Publications (http://www.adtdl.army.mil)
• Navy Publications (http://www.nwdc.navy.smil.mil)

MCI Course 8101 7-61 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Requisitioning

Introduction Doctrinal publications facilitate mission accomplishment; therefore,


commanders must take a personal interest in publications ordering and
maintenance. All Marine Corps units shall maintain doctrinal publications
appropriate to the mission of the organization.

Marine Corps The Marine Corps Publication Distribution System (MCPDS) is an on-line
Publication interactive system that facilitates continuing distribution of changes and
Distribution revisions for basic publications held by a command or activity that has been
System assigned as Individual Activity Code (IAC). It also provides the capability to
order publications if stocked at Marine Corps Logistics Base (MCLB),
Albany GA, display PCN information, create backorders, and maintain
internal distribution locations.

Publication The publication listing is an electronic display in the Marine Corps


Listing (PL) Publication Distribution System (MCPDS). MCPDS lists every publication
that is to be distributed to a unit automatically. Traditionally MCPDS users
reside in the Adjutant, S-1, or administrative section of a unit.

Establishing Every unit that receives publications has an Individual Activity Code (IAC)
Publication assigned. Commanders must determine the publications requirements for
Requirements their individual units since every unit is unique. This determination is derived
for a variety factors such as

• Mission
• Geographic location
• Experience of the members of the unit

Publication requirements should be realistic and based on mission-essential


criteria.

MCI Course 8101 7-62 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Maintenance

Maintaining a Supervision is the most important action taken in maintaining and revising a
PL PL and ordering publications. PL managers should aggressively review and
follow-up on the status of all publication requests, as well as closely tracking
unit requirements for additional or replacement publications.

Requisitioning Most Marine Corps publications are stocked at the Marine Corps Logistics
Publications Base (MCLB), Albany GA, and can be ordered electronically by publication
control number (PCN) through MCPDS.

Requesting Publications not stocked in MCPDS will be ordered by submitting a written


Non-stocked request in standard naval format to the Commandant of the Marine Corps
Publications CMC (ARD) Administration and Resources Management Division and
include the following information:

• Complete identification of the publication


• Title
• Stock number (if known)
• The source document (in which identified)
• Equipment item designator number (if applicable)
• Source of supply (if known)
• Justification for publication
• Point of contact
• Telephone/FAX number and E-mail address
• Individual Activity Code (IAC)
• State if requisition is a one-time issue or continuing distribution

Classified Marine Corps activities with a requirement for classified Marine Corps
Marine Corps publications will requisition by PCN through MCPDS. Services outside the
Publications Marine Corps will submit a written request to CMC (ARDE) Publishing and
Logistics Systems Management Section in standard Naval format to include:

• Statement attesting that classified storage capabilities exist


• Publication short title and subject (if known)
• Number of copies required
• Justification
• Point of contact (including name and telephone number)
• Complete military mailing address

MCI Course 8101 7-63 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Directives Control Point (DCP)

Purpose The directives control point evaluates the system’s operations within the
individual organization on a continuing basis, and analyzes directives, making
recommendations for improvement when appropriate.

Function The DCP functions under the guidelines set forth in MCO P5215.1 Marine
Corps Publications. Under consolidated administration, it publishes all
required publications at the organizational level. Subordinate units will not
maintain a separate DCP. The following functions fall under the
responsibility of the DCP:

• Controlling the issuance of command-issued publications


• Coordinating the organization’s requirements for publications
• Determining and effecting internal distribution of authorized inventories of
publications and their maintenance
• Organizing and maintaining the DCP
• Maintaining, storing, accounting for, and controlling the organization’s
classified material
• Conducting daily operation of the CMCC (Classified Materials Control
Center)

Distribution of Distribution of authorized publications inventories is based strictly upon a


Authorized “need to know.” Commanders, officers in charge, or department heads
Publication should strictly adhere to the “need to know” criterion. A “yes” answer to one
Inventories or more of the following questions would indicate a “need to know”:

• Is the publication applicable to the specific mission of the user?


• Is the publication applicable to the user’s administrative functions?
• Is the publication applicable to the unit’s organic equipment, or
maintenance functions?
• Is the publication applicable to the user’s support functions designated, or
inherent to the user?
• Is the dissemination of the publication for command information of
action?
• If the publication is desired for reference purposes, how frequently will it
be used?

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-64 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Directives Control Point (DCP), Continued

Distribution To facilitate information security, dissemination of Marine Corps publications


Statements was formally restricted only by designating a publication either “controlled”
or “non-controlled.” DoD 5200.1R states, “certain information that would be
designated unclassified may require classification when combined or
associated with other unclassified information.” Sponsors shall identify the
degree of restriction of distribution for each of their non-technical and
technical publications based on distribution statements. The table below lists
the seven distribution statements:

Designator Distribution Statement


A Approved for public release, distribution unlimited
B Authorized to U.S. Government agencies only
C Authorized to U.S. Government agencies and their
contractors
D Authorized to DoD and DoD contractors only
E Authorized to DoD components only
F Further dissemination only as directed by DoD or higher
authority
X Authorized to U.S. Government agencies and private
individuals or enterprises eligible to obtain export-controlled
technical data in accordance with OPNAVINST 5510.161

Command The DCP will establish and maintain the command’s official correspondence
Correspondence file, per SECNAVINST 5210.11 and MCO 5210.11. Staff-sections may be
File
authorized to hold copies of command correspondence that they originate and
sign “by direction,” file the official file copy within the DCP.

MCI Course 8101 7-65 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3


Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which publications contain general reference and historical material?

a. MCDP
b. MCWP
c. MTTP
d. MCRP

Item 2 Which internet website lists unclassified publications, orders, directives and
technical publications?

a. www.doctrine.usmc.mil
b. www.dtic.mil/doctrine
c. www.usmc.mil
d. www.mbw.usmc.mil

Item 3 What is a capability of the Marine Corps Publication Distribution System?

a. Assign individual activity codes


b. Maintain internal distribution locations
c. Create publication control numbers
d. Inventory stock at the Marine Corps Logistics Base Albany

Item 4 Which is one of the factors for determining publication requirements?

a. Experience of the members of the unit


b. Type of organic equipment possessed by the unit
c. Size of the unit
d. Command structure

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-66 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 5 Which is a function of the directives control point?

a. Ensure compliance to all orders and directives


b. Establish section directives control points
c. Control the issuance of command-issued publications
d. Establish individual activity codes

Item 6 Distribution Statement “C” authorizes dissemination of Marine Corps


publications to ___________________.

a. DoD components only


b. U.S. Government agencies and their contractors
c. DoD and DoD contractors only
d. U.S. Government agencies only

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 7-67 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page


1 d 7-58
2 c 7-61
3 b 7-62
4 a 7-62
5 c 7-64
6 b 7-65

MCI Course 8101 7-68 Study Unit 7, Lesson 3 Exercise


STUDY UNIT 8
EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATIONS
Overview

Estimated 3 hours, 40 minutes


Study Time

Unit Scope This course provides the staff noncommissioned officer with writing
guidelines to plan, develop, and publish effective communications through
the critical and creative thinking process.

Marine staff noncommissioned officers operate in an environment that


requires many skills to provide effective leadership and guidance to seniors,
peers, and subordinates. The ability to communicate effectively can improve
organizational and personal performance.

Learning After completing this study unit, you should be able to


Objectives
• List the seven principles of critical thinking.

• Identify critical thinking.

• Identify chunking.

• Identify inferences.

• Identify implications.

• Identify complications.

• Identify the principles used to enhance creative thinking.

• Identify the three components of preparation in reference to critical


thinking.

• Identify the eight factors that compose a writing standard.

• Identify terms associated with effective writing.

Continued on next page


MCI Course 8101 8-1 Study Unit 8
Overview, Continued

In This Study This study unit contains the following lessons:


Unit

Topic See Page


Lesson 1 Reasoning and Standards 8-3
Lesson 2 The Writing Process 8-25
Lesson 3 Effective Writing 8-43

MCI Course 8101 8-2 Study Unit 8


LESSON 1
REASONING AND STANDARDS
Introduction

Estimated 1 hour
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson is designed to introduce the SNCO with reasoning processes that
can be enhanced though the use of standards. The reasoning processes
support the writing process because the two are closely related.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the seven principles of critical thinking.

• Identify the four creative thinking principles.

• Identify the eight content standards.

• Identify the two principles of logic.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page


Introduction 8-3
Critical Thinking 8-4
Critical Thinking Principles 8-6
Creative Thinking 8-11
Writing Standards 8-13
Lesson 1 Exercise 8-21

MCI Course 8101 8-3 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Critical Thinking

Introduction Staff noncommissioned officers (SNCOs) provide units and Marines with
problem solving skills based on military experience and education across a
broad spectrum of application areas. The problem solving skills are based on
the SNCOs ability to

• Collect information
• Select the information that specifically applies to the situation or issue
• Solve the problem or change the outcome of a situation

This problem solving technique, which is an integral part of Marine


leadership, can be classified as a simplified version of critical thinking.

Definition Critical thinking is the ability to combine observations, experiences, and


theoretical solutions into a practical solution.

The solution may be multi-layered in application depending on the depth and


breadth of the task, problem, or situation. The ability to assess the proper
solution, solution intensity, and area of application is based on the judgment
of the SNCO.

SNCO The leadership applications of critical thinking are used on a daily basis in all
Leadership operating environments. Critical thinking links the SNCO’s leadership,
Applications education, and experience into a thought process that links decision making
into solutions.

The SNCO’s recognition abilities, properly called cognitive skills, are


essential for the effective leadership and management within organizations of
the Marine Corps. The combination of experience and military education
allows the SNCO to optimize the performance of their Marines and increases
the efficiency of their organizations, which ultimately enhances the unit
combat readiness.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-4 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Critical Thinking, Continued

Application to The writing process uses the critical thinking problem solving processes to
Writing simplify the research and composition process. The SNCO uses the critical
thinking process to divide the problem or topic into smaller more manageable
elements. The smaller elements can be effectively developed into subtopics
used to populate a document outline. The process produces a higher quality
and more effective document and presentation.

MCI Course 8101 8-5 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Critical Thinking Principles

Principles For simplicity, critical thinking will be divided into the following steps.

Step Action
1 Define the objective.
2 Divide the objective into components.
3 Determine the point of view.
4 Gather data.
5 Identify supporting concepts.
6 Identify inferences.
7 Identify implications and consequences.

Define the Defining the objective establishes what is to be accomplished by the critical
Objective thinking process.

Critical thinking applications related to writing require the author to clearly


identify the documents’ purpose, goal, or objective. The author should be
able to answer the “what” and “why” behind the writing task.

The SNCO’s professional writing tasks will normally have a defined


objective, but that objective may need clarification or amplification to meet
the needs of the commander or individual requesting the information.

For example:

The MAGTF

While the above subject is valid, it is also broad.

The GCE of the MAGTF

The second subject is clarified to a specific element of the MAGTF.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-6 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Critical Thinking Principles, Continued

Dividing The ability to divide the objective into components, underlying issues, or
Objectives subtopics breaks the task into more workable elements. Smaller, simplified
elements increase the speed that an individual can develop a solution.

In writing, the ability to divide the objective into components assists in the
writing of the document, development, design, and organization.

For example:

The MAGTF

Again, this is a broad subject.

Three elements comprise the MAGTF, the ACE, GCE, and the CSSE.

The subject has been simplified into three smaller elements.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-7 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Critical Thinking Principles, Continued

Point of View The point of view is the perspective from which the document is written.

In professional writing, the point of view may have to reflect the official point
of view of the organization, policy, or leadership. As a SNCO, you may be
required to produce a written document for signature by the officer that
controls the unit or organizational element.

The author should be aware of his or her personal prejudices and biases, so
that the writing remains factual and, or emotionally neutral. Point of view
often separates technical writing from creative writing. Technical writing
uses facts to sway the reader to his or her point of view. Creative writing
often uses an editorial point of view to emotionally move the reader to the
presented point of view.

For example:

I feel that a corrosion control program must be put in place to avoid the
effects of salt water on exposed metal.

The writer has put his opinion or view into the sentence.

The most recent analysis on the corrosive effect of salt water on exposed
metal shows…

The second sentence does not show point of view, but instead uses gathered
data.

Gather Data Critical thinking is dependent on evidence or data to build support or reject an
objective, issue, or position. Data can come in the form of experience,
information, or environmental stimuli.

When gathering data for a writing task, the author should investigate the
objective from all possible vantage points and then determine what is
pertinent to the objective. Later in the process, the data will be organized into
a presentation format and then drafted into a document.

The data must be clear, accurate, and relevant. The author should be aware
that any outcomes, claims, or solutions are supported by data.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-8 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Critical Thinking Principles, Continued

Supporting Critical thinking or reasoning is supported by concepts that can include


Concepts theories, principles, self-evident truths, and rules of implicit reasoning. The
concepts govern how the author rationalizes the outcome that he or she has
derived. Any defects in the concepts or basis for reasoning become a source
of problems when the decision or outcome is scrutinized. Since concepts are
an integral part of reasoning, apply the following guidelines:

• Identify supporting concepts and explain them clearly.


• Consider alternative concepts and definitions.
• Ensure concepts are applied with precision.

Inferences Inferences are conclusions based on evidence, environmental factors, and/or


experience if it is applicable to the objective. Inferences are important in that
they give data meaning. Identifying these inferences and putting them into
application is a key part of critical thinking.

In writing, inferences are used to organize data into groups to support


objectives in the body of the document. Conclusions found at the end of
documents are inferences that are the results of critical thinking, which give
the document specific meaning in the form of a result, recommendation, or
documented outcome.

Implications An implication occurs when a claim or truth follows from two or more
and premises, which are conclusions drawn from experience or application.
Consequences Consequences are results from an action or condition. Combining the two
terms in relationship to each other creates the assumption that the
implications suggest consequences or results that may or will occur under
certain conditions.

Marine leaders have used the same concept in tactical decision-making games
(TDG). Developing a plan of action based on experience to meet a certain set
of criteria based on the most probable course of action by the enemy is the
goal of the TDG.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-9 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Critical Thinking Principles, Continued

SNCO The ability to evaluate an objective or analyze a problem and communicate a


Applications response is a skill mastered through experience, which is a keystone of the
SNCO’s corps’ leadership and mentoring process. Critical thinking is not a
new skill to the SNCO, it is merely a new concept that adds depth to the
problem solving application.

Communicating the same response in writing is merely diversification of the


already developed communication and critical thinking skills. The
diversification of critical thinking and communication skills to writing
increases professionalism of the SNCO corps to meet the increased leadership
and performance demands placed on the individual SNCO.

MCI Course 8101 8-10 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Creative Thinking

Definition Creative thinking is a process that allows an individual to take an objective,


data and develop an innovative solution.

Application SNCOs train and develop the Marines under their charge to “think out of the
box,” which is the common term for creative thinking.

The ability to communicate creative thinking requires the SNCO to project


his or her thoughts via written and electronic media in addition to verbalizing
the ideas. As the terminology, technology, and techniques used in
warfighting and leadership change, the SNCO must continue to develop
additional skills to support effective communications.

Principles To optimize the level of creative thinking, the SNCO should

• Develop initiative and versatility.


• Prepare his or her mind to be receptive to ideas regardless of the source.
• Generate ideas that solve the problem at hand.
• Test and validate new ideas to see if they work or not.

Initiative and Initiative is the ability to develop and follow through with a plan. Versatility
Versatility is the ability to do many things competently. Combining the two elements
produces a viable plan or action that could be executed in an effective
manner.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-11 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Creative Thinking, Continued

Preparation Preparation is the application of collecting data in the form of

• Reading
• Listening
• Discussing
• Reflecting

The data is then evaluated for actual application to the problem or objective
currently being evaluated.

Generate Ideas Generation is the actual production of a new idea. This may not appear to be
as much work as preparation, but it can require a lot of patience. Generation
involves letting your mind explore new directions, putting your subconscious
mind to work.

Test and Validation tests or substantiates the new idea to see if it’s any good.
Validate Validation proves, confirms, and substantiates ideas. Every idea needs
validation, which requires thinking that is more convergent in nature.
Convergent thinking encourages knowledge, decision, and evaluation to test
the idea and conduct experiments.

MCI Course 8101 8-12 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards

Introduction SNCOs are familiar with an array of standards related to performance,


behavior, and a quantifying condition in every duty that has been assigned
previously or currently. Writing has many standards that can be applied such
as style, format, and grammar usage. This particular section will address the
general content standards for content review, which should be used to analyze
documents in the draft through final copy evaluation.

Definition A standard assists and guides the quality of reasoning and thinking on any
topic. When applied to writing, it will help the author of a document create a
quality document that accurately and appropriately presents information on
the topic.

Content Reviewing a written document to ensure that it projects the focus and intent
Standards of the author can be a challenge. An author should evaluate a document using
the following content standards:

• Clarity
• Accuracy
• Precision
• Relevance
• Depth
• Breadth
• Significance
• Logic

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-13 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards, Continued

Clarity Clarity refers to how clear something is. In critical thinking, clarity allows
faster assimilation of the data into the thought process. When applied to
writing, the document should project the writing objective to the reader
directly, which will enable them to make a judgment, decision, or inference
quickly.

Chunking Chunking is a principle that applies to the effective communication of


information that is particularly useful in written communications. Chunking
originated in the 1950’s by a Harvard psychologist named George Miller. His
journal article, “The Magical Number Seven, Plus or Minus Two,” dealt with
how many numbers people could reliably be expected to remember a few
minutes after having been told these numbers only once. This principle can
be applied to all information.

If the author is unsure of a document’s clarity, the following approach using a


questioning technique to help “chunk” the topic into smaller pieces can assist
the author in the document revision process.

• What is another way to express the same idea?


• What additional information could be included to add more clarity?
• Would an example or illustration assist in making the point clearer to the
reader?

It’s possible to have multiple answers to the questions used to “chunk” the
topic into more definitive terms. Limiting the scope or range of the document
objective are examples on how the author could change the structure of the
document that would increase the clarity to meet the objective.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-14 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards, Continued

Accuracy Accuracy is how close a decision or output is to the truth or standard.

TARGET THE TRUTH

TRUTH

In writing and marksmanship, effective targeting improves the accuracy.


Targeting the perceived truth increases accuracy and validity.

TRUTH TRUTH

Inaccurate Accurate

Information The accuracy of the information makes it more useful to the reader. Vague
facts or information provide the reader with incomplete conclusion.
Misinformation causes the reader to draw the wrong conclusion about the
topic or objective.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-15 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards, Continued

Precision Precision describes the quality of the accuracy or the exactness of the output.

For example:

Abraham Lincoln was the President of the United States during the American
Civil War.

While the sentence above is accurate, it is not very precise.

Abraham Lincoln, 16th President of the United States, held office from 1861
to 1865 during which the country was embroiled in Civil War.

The second sentence adds precision to the accuracy in that it clearly defines
the accuracy of the statement.

In writing, precision can also relate to the conciseness of a document, which


is communicating the maximum quantity of information using a minimum
amount of words. The second sentence can be made more concise by
eliminating the wordiness.

The 16th President of the United States, Abraham Lincoln, held office during
the Civil War from 1861 to 1865.

Determining the target audience and the goal of the document are important
factors when determining the level of precision that a document contains.

Relevance Relevance is the relationship between the subject or writing objective and the
data gathered. The ability to isolate and organize relevant information is
essential to critical thinking and the related reasoning processes.

The analogy of apples and oranges mixed together in a fruit bowl illustrates
how irrelevant data could look when put together. The error occurs when the
conglomeration is classified as either apples or oranges when it is neither.
The relevance sorts out the apples and oranges into separate categories.

In writing, the data has to support the writing objective. This is especially
true for the development of a professional document used to support decisions
or decision-making. The introduction of impertinent facts reduces the
effectiveness of the data presented to the audience by clouding the issue.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-16 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards, Continued

Depth Depth is the level or degree that the subject, issue, or topic is addressed.
Experience or training levels often reflect the proficiency of the individuals
involved in application or process. The greater the proficiency, the greater
level of detail that can be used in the application.

In writing, depth is the level of detail at which the document is written.


Audience analysis and a clear understanding of the document purpose is
crucial to defining the correct level of depth. It also dictates the vocabulary
and format used to develop a document.

For example, a SNCO preparing a period of instruction (POI) for Marines


within a platoon or section would contrast greatly with a presentation
prepared for officers and SNCOs based on experience and the application
level.

In simplified terms, depth is like swimming. It is easier to swim on the


surface of water than it is to swim underwater, since you can breath with ease.
The deeper you swim in the water the more effort it takes to swim, since you
still have to surface and return to the desired depth. Ask questions to add
depth. See the example on the following page.

Breadth Breadth is the width or scope of the topic or objective that the document is
addressing. Breath or scope allows consideration for opposing, consenting,
and supporting points of view.

SNCO authors can increase the effectiveness of their professional writing by


ensuring that enough relevant information is included to present a clear and
informed perspective of the topic.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-17 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards, Continued

Questions to The following are some questions that may be addressed to assist the SNCO
Ask in the writing process to add breadth to a subject or objective.

• What are other points of view or deviation in the facts or perspectives on


the subject?

• If there are different points of view, deviation in the facts, or perspectives,


how do they differ and why?

• Structure the document to support breadth in a logical manner while


maintaining the clarity of the document.

• Would individuals outside of the organization understand the document and


the manner in which it presents the topic or objective?

• Is there historical or demographic (information on population segments)


data that applies to the topic?

• Are there tactical considerations that could be included in a document to


increase the breadth?

Significance Significance refers to the importance of the fact, opinion, or perception.


Writing applications generally occur in the design stage of the document.
Understanding the objective allows the author to sort out the data that is
significant to the objective or topic.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-18 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards, Continued

Logic Logic refers to the reasoning process. In writing, logic allows the author to
evaluate information and make a determination on how it relates to the other
standards. An author must determine how to craft the information in a
document that

• Meets the objective goals.


• Supports an organized or reasonable organization format.
• Presents and projects the pertinent facts.
• Allows reader to understand and assimilate the information and make
decisions based on facts.

Logic is the adhesive that binds the other standards together in the thinking
and writing processes. While the application of logic occurs within the
author’s internal thought process during the design and development of a
document, the author must project the same information to the reader. The
ability to transfer reasoning externally is an essential element of the
professional writing process, since the decision making process can be based
on the quality of a written document.

Principles of Principles of logic follow two basic patterns:


Logic
• Inductive reasoning
• Deductive reasoning

Inductive Inductive reasoning requires an individual to gather data to


Reasoning
• Support a hypothesis, which is an explanation that can be proven by testing
and often referred to as the scientific method

• Make observations that can be used as evidence to make a generalization


based on the observations, also called an inference

While inductive reasoning has a certain amount of uncertainty, the hypothesis


allows us to accept certain generalizations based on premises and the resulting
conclusions. The discovery or additional information can change the
generalization, which would lead the individual to change the support
position.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-19 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Writing Standards, Continued

Deductive Deductive reasoning utilizes premises based on generalities to develop a


Reasoning conclusion about a specific situation. Effective deductive reasoning is a result
of analyzing using the ideas of validity and soundness. A valid deductive
argument is one in which the premises support the conclusion structurally. If
the premises of a valid argument are true, it is impossible to get a false
conclusion.

Summary In this lesson, you learned to apply critical reasoning and critical thinking
principles to the writing process in order to enhance your communicative
skills.

In the next lesson, you will learn about the principles and process used to
develop a writing objective.

MCI Course 8101 8-20 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1


Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated 15 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of the lesson.

Item 1 The seven principles of critical thinking are define the objects, divide the
objective into components, determine the point of view, gather data, identify
supporting concepts, _________, and __________consequences.

a. identify inferences/identify implications and


b. identify implications/consequences, logic and
c. identify logic/reasoning process and
d. identify inferences, implications/the reasoning process and

Item 2 What are the four creative thinking principles?

a. Develop initiative, prepare your mind to be receptive to ideas regardless


of the source, generate ideas that solve the problem at hand, and have edit
revise it for content

b. Develop initiative and versatility, prepare your mind to be receptive to


ideas regardless of the source, generate ideas that solve the problem at
hand, and test and validate new ideas to see if they work or not

c. Develop initiative, generate ideas that solve the problem at hand, chunk
the ideas, and test and validate new ideas to see if they work or not

d. Prepare your mind to be receptive to ideas regardless of the source,


chunk the ideas then, generate ideas that solve the problem at hand, and
test and validate new ideas to see if they work.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-21 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 3 Which of the below are not content standards?

a. Clarity, accuracy, and precision


b. Relevance, depth, and breadth
c. Significance and logic
d. Standard, chunking, and reasoning

Item 4 What is accuracy?

a. Exactness of the output


b. The relationship between the subject or writing objective
c. How close a decision or output is to the truth or standard
d. The level or degree of the subject

Item 5 What are the two principles of logic?

a. Observation and goal


b. Hypothesis and objective
c. Inductive reasoning and deductive reasoning
d. Reasonable organization and objective goals

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-22 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1 Exercise


Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items, refer to the reference
page.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 8-6
2 b 8-11
3 d 8-13
4 c 8-15
5 c 8-19

MCI Course 8101 8-23 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 8-24 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1 Exercise


LESSON 2
INITIATING THE WRITING PROCESS
Introduction

Estimated 1 hour
Study Time

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the principles and processes used to develop a writing
objective into a usable document.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify the purpose of writing
• Define hypothesis
• Identify mind mapping for gathering data
• Identify the key elements of an outline

In This Lesson This section contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 8-25
Defining the Objective 8-26
Developing Assumptions 8-27
The Planning Process 8-29
The Writing Process 8-35
Lesson 2 Exercise 8-40

MCI Course 8101 8-25 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


Defining the Objective

Introduction Military operations begin with a clearly stated purpose called a mission
statement. The mission statement is used by commanders to develop a five
paragraph order, because the format provides the command with a detailed
plan of action. The writing process is similar in that you will normally have a
defined purpose or objective that will be the guideline of the document
development.

Writing A writing purpose is the goal or what the document is supposed to


Purpose accomplish. A writing purpose can be used to develop any document type
and can be editorially or emotionally biased in nature. Individuals authoring
documents should understand that a topic or subject names the content, but
the purpose is what the document achieves through presentation.

An example of a writing purpose could be to write a book on Military


Operations Other Than War (MOOTW).

Writing A writing objective is similar to writing purpose, but the document should be
Objective written as unbiased or unprejudiced as possible and can be based on
observable phenomenon or summarized results. Since it is format that an
individual or group can use to present information to support decision-making
or process facilitation, the factual aspect of a writing objective supports
professional writing.

Professional Professional writing at the SNCO level is likely to be restricted in content,


Writing context, and format to meet specific mission requirements. Generally, a staff
officer or commander with the appropriate authority to enforce a decision or
policy will forward the information for disposition.

Example An example of a writing objective could be to write an after action report to


support development of military operations other than war (MOOTW)
procedures addressing the transition from U.S. led initiatives to international
forces. The development of transition procedures answers what is to be
developed and the parameters are that it applies to a transition from a U.S.-to
an international force.

MCI Course 8101 8-26 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


Developing Assumptions

Introduction In the operational forces, leaders are often forced to develop a plan of action
based on the expected enemy action. Writing objectives may not be enough
for the SNCO to develop a document without further investigation. Writing
that requires the author to formulate assumptions has a set of associated terms
that will be discussed in this lesson section.

Hypothesis A hypothesis is an educated guess based on specific assumptions that directs


the author’s thinking toward possible solutions or outcomes. The formulated
hypothesis, commonly referred to as an educated guess, may reflect one or
more points of view that may help the author to focus on the exact topic,
issue, or problem that the written document is addressing.

Example An hypotheses relating to the MOOTW topic introduced in previous sections


could be similar to one of the following possibilities:

• In a MOOTW environment, the operational transition of the command


and control element is a critical issue for continuity of ongoing
operations.

• When U.S. forces transition to international forces, there is potential for


operational and procedural problems.

• The U.S. military has developed a new global role as a rapid deployment
force.

Assumptions An assumption is a self-evident condition required to complete your research.


You discover the assumptions by asking yourself, "What is it that I'm taking
for granted?"

Identifying Before accepting any assumption as valid, you must determine whether the
Assumptions self-evident condition nullifies or supports your investigation. Some
assumptions are so self-evident that you may err by not identifying them.
Without identifying your assumptions, you won't know if they are valid or
invalid.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-27 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


Developing Assumptions, Continued

Example For example, if you are evaluating computer-assisted training for Marine
development, you may assume that Marines can read. If they cannot read,
then your educated guess is invalid.

Now, consider the first assumption, "Less than 10 percent of the Albanians
understand English." This statement assumes that a non-English speaking
population may increase the potential for mission failure. If this assumption
is true, then a condition exists that nullifies part or all of your investigation.

MCI Course 8101 8-28 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Planning Process

Introduction Getting started is one of the greatest difficulties that skilled and unskilled
researchers and writers face. The planning process is a technique of gathering
data on paper to create a starting point with a direction of content.

Requirement Your first step is to understand clearly what the actual requirement is, not just
what you think it is.

Clarification of the requirement calls for the Marine to use good critical
reasoning skills to ensure you understand the requirement, its ramifications,
and what you need to accomplish.

Gathering Data Your second step is to begin gathering data. One technique is mindmapping.
Mindmapping is a structured brainstorming technique that emphasizes
capturing the free flow ideas and discovering the relationships within and
between the ideas. This tool can be used to help you identify what you
already know about a given topic along with showing you where you need
more information.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-29 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Planning Process, Continued

Mindmapping First, take a sheet of paper and record in the top/center the general topic of
your paper. In this case, you would write the words Marine Expeditionary
Unit. Underneath the topic write down who the paper is for, your audience:
Marines NCOs, as shown in the example below.

Marine
Expeditionary
Unit
Marine NCOs

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-30 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Planning Process, Continued

Knowledge Next, randomly record everything you know about the topic and your
About the audience.
Topic

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-31 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Planning Process, Continued

Relationship Look over your notes and identify the relationships among the ideas you have
recorded. Tie these ideas together using symbols and lines that help you to
see them.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-32 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Planning Process, Continued

Major Parts Finally, transfer these relationships to another sheet of paper. At this point
you will be able to see the major parts of your research along with holes
where you need more information.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-33 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Planning Process, Continued

Summary Now you can use your time effectively to collect information on specific
areas where you need further data rather than trying to research everything on
Marine Expeditionary Units.

MCI Course 8101 8-34 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Writing Process

Introduction Good writing follows a plan. The plan tells the reader what your thesis is and
its major reasons. It presents facts that support each major reason. It shows
your analysis of the facts, opinions, and ideas that support your thesis. It
concludes with a brief summary restating your thesis.

Thesis A thesis is a position or proposition that a person advances and offers to


maintain an argument.

Developing a A thesis statement reflects the thesis and writing purpose. It is the key point
Thesis you are trying to make. The thesis statement tells the audience why the topic
Statement demands attention what you want to prove, present, or defend.

To develop a concise thesis statement, use the following process.

• Define the audience.


• Ensure the thesis and purpose equate.
• Set the writing parameters to effectively present the appropriate information
to the reader.

Mnemonic As a mnemonic device, you can ask yourself the following questions:
Device
• For whom am I writing? (audience) Sergeants and Corporals

• Why am I writing this? (purpose) Introduce NCOs to the Marine


Expeditionary Unit

• What obvious topics should I avoid? (freshness)

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-35 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Writing Process, Continued

Pyramid of Outlining is like designing a pyramid from the top down. You begin by
Support selecting the topic and forming it into a thesis statement. This becomes the
capstone of the pyramid. The next layer down consists of your major points.
The subsequent layers consist of your evidence and analysis. Your analysis
explains the importance of the evidence with respect to the thesis.

Below is a graphic showing the pyramid of support:

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-36 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Writing Process, Continued

Key Elements The key elements of an outline are as follows:

• Introduction – thesis and major points


• The development of the thesis – major reasons with evidence
• Conclusion – review of major reasons and support of the thesis

First Draft The purpose of drafting is to dump, very quickly, all your information you
want to pass onto the page. Your focus needs to be on the substance and
organization of your document, not on what the final product may look like.

Techniques Two techniques that can help you accomplish writing a first draft are to using
your outline and drafting it quickly.

• Your outline will help keep you focused on both substance and organization
of your paper.

• Write quickly as the ideas come to mind. Don’t worry about the perfect
word or the perfect sentence. The purpose is to capture the ideas that
race
through your mind.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-37 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Writing Process, Continued

Revising the Sufficient time must be set aside for revising your draft. The writer should
Draft follow an established criteria to review and revise their writing.

The following chart may be used as a guide when you are conducting the
revision of your draft.

Clarity Requires you to explain, illustrate, give examples,


interpret, elaborate, refine, and resolve. You must
express your thoughts clearly and limit the use of
jargon.
Accuracy Does the evidence support your assertions? Have you
hit the right target?
Precision Are you specific? Is the detail sufficient to support
your position?
Relevance Have you shown the reader how your position is part of
the problem and how it addresses the question with a
solution.
Depth Does your writing identify those factors that make this a
difficult problem? Are you dealing with the most
significant factors?
Breadth Have you identified and considered other points of
view? How do they relate to your problem?
Significance Have you really addressed the central idea? Which
facts are the most important?
Logic The combination of words are mutually supporting and
make sense in order and combination.

Proofreading Proofreading means to check and mark the final draft of your paper. When
proofreading, you look for mistakes that include typing errors and anything
else that is incorrect. If you discover too many problems for a final copy,
reassess your paper, determine if you are saying what you want, make
corrections, and then reprint. Repeat this process until you are ready to
produce the final draft.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-38 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


The Writing Process, Continued

Summary Following a good plan or outline is the key to writing a successful paper.
Develop a plan, write a draft, and proof your work to produce a final draft.
You now have the groundwork to effectively compose a paper.

MCI Course 8101 8-39 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2


Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated 15 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of the lesson.

Item 1 What is the writing purpose?

a. The goal or what the document is suppose to accomplish


b. Written as unbiased as possible to support the thesis
c. To relay the mission statement
d. The goal or what the document is formatted to

Item 2 What is the definition of hypothesis?

a. A self-confident position required to complete your research.


b. An educated guess based on specific assumptions that directs the authors
thinking toward possible solutions or outcomes.
c. A technique used by skilled and unskilled writers in the planning phase.
d. A logical technique of gathering data.

Item 3 What is mindmapping?

a. A tool used to modify the layout of the thesis statement.


b. A tool to mentally compile ideas or thoughts without ever needing to
write them down.
c. A technique of gathering data where you compile ideas in your mind and
write them directly down in your thesis statement.
d. A technique of gathering data that emphasizes capturing free flow ideas
and discovering the relationships within and between ideas.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-40 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 What are the key elements of an outline?

a. Major points, thesis, and the conclusion


b. Thesis, thesis statement, and the conclusion
c. Introduction, the development of the thesis, and the conclusion
d. Thesis, introduction, and the conclusion

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-41 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2 Exercise


Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 8-26
2 b 8-27
3 d 8-29
4 c 8-37

MCI Course 8101 8-42 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2 Exercise


LESSON 3
EFFECTIVE WRITING
Introduction

Estimated 1 hour
Study Time

Lesson Scope Before starting to write, you should know what you wish to convey. SNCOs
will write various documents for one reason or another. You must write in an
effective way so readers of the document understand, believe, and can act on
the information relayed to them. The following lesson will provide different
techniques to aid you in writing your document effectively.

Learning After completing this lesson, you should be able to


Objectives
• Identify personal pronouns.

• Identify contractions.

• Identify the term tightening as it applies to writing.

• Identify brevity.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page


Introduction 8-43
Personal Pronouns 8-44
Vocabulary Selection 8-45
Compact Writing 8-48
Lesson 3 Exercise 8-50

MCI Course 8101 8-43 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3


Personal Pronouns

Introduction A personal pronoun is a pronoun that expresses a distinction of a participants


role. You do not need to go out of your way to use or avoid a personal
pronoun. Avoiding natural references to people is false modesty.

Principles of Whether you sign “by direction” or with a title, use the following principles.
Personal
Pronouns • Speak of your activity, command, or office as we, us, or our. These words
are no more exact or inexact than the vague word it. They are merely
conventions of modern writing that prevent much roundabout language.

• Use you, stated or implied, to refer to the reader.

• Use I, me, and my less in correspondence signed by the commanding


officer and then only to show special concern or warmth.

Overdoing You can overdue personal pronouns. You can use so many pronouns that you
Personal can obscure the subject, and no number of them will overcome confused
Pronouns thinking.

If we or I opens more than two sentences in a row, the writing becomes


monotonous and may suggest self-centeredness. Sometimes a single sentence
can call too much attention to the writer.

MCI Course 8101 8-44 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3


Vocabulary Selection

Introduction The complexity of our work and the need for precision require some big
words. However, don’t use big words when little ones will do. People who
speak with small words often let needlessly fancy ones burden their writing.

Rely on Everyday words are used commonly and frequently; therefore, their
Everyday understanding is clear. Rely on common words versus overly dressed words.
Words Below are a few examples.

Instead Of Try
Commence Start
Facilitate Help
Optimum Best
Promulgate Issue
Utilize Use

Short spoken Use short, spoken transitions over long, bookish ones. Save long transitions
Transitions for variety. By using short ones, you help set an ordinary tone for the rest of
what you say. Below are a few examples.

Instead Of Try
Consequently So
However But
In addition Also
Nevertheless Still

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-45 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3


Vocabulary Selection, Continued

Needless All writers try to impress readers. This is accomplished through language
Complications that does not call attention to itself. Avoid the needless complications of
legalistic words or words used in legal style documents lingo. Write to
express not impress. Below are a few examples.

Legalistic Normal
Aforesaid The, that
Heretofore Until now
Herewith is Here is
The undersigned I

Contractions Contractions link pronouns with words and make verbs negative. They are
appropriate in less formal writing situations. Even when writing a formal
document, you can use contractions in drafts to help you write naturally. If
contractions seem out of place, you may need to reword what you are trying
to say.

Short Sentences Long and short sentences should be mixed together for variety. Short
sentences cannot guarantee clarity, but they are less confusing than long ones.
The average sentence is about twenty words or two typed lines.

Be Specific Generalizations are necessary to avoid getting bogged down in detail.


However, such broad language is not likely to spark the reader’s interest as it
did the writers. Stay away from overusing vague terms and be specific to
give the writing flavor. Below are a few examples.

Instead Of Try
Aircraft Plane
Jet Harrier
Improved costs Lower costs
Enhanced method Faster Method

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-46 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3


Vocabulary Selection, Continued

Be Precise There is not a list of rules for letter writing, but no document can avoid
reference to some rules. One necessary rule in writing a military document is,
be precise.

When your writing is definite in its manner and plain in its language it is
likely to be vivid, so that your words walk up and down in the mind of your
reader. Sharp, defined sentences that spark interest while simultaneously
relaying the writers message.

Clarity When writing, the reader must be able to understand the point you are trying
to make. This is achieved by eliminating confusion and making sentences
clear, concise, and concrete. An easy rule of thumb is the 5-Ws and an H.

• Who
• What
• Where
• When
• Why
• How

A sentence consists of an arrangement of words to transmit a thought. The


words you select, their clarity, conciseness, and how you arrange them
directly affects whether your audience will understand your message. A clear
and logical sentence is one that has both coherence and unity. A concise
sentence expresses an idea with as few words as possible.

Tone Tone is a writer’s attitude toward the subject or readers. Because much of our
writing is routine, tone causes several problems when the matter is delicate.
The more sensitive the reader or issue, the more careful we must be to
promote good will. Tactlessness in writing suggests clumsiness in general.
When feelings are involved, one misused word can make an enemy.

MCI Course 8101 8-47 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3


Compact Writing

Introduction Give your ideas no more words than they deserve. The longer you take to say
things, the weaker you come across and the more you risk blurring ideas.
You are not writing to be impressive, but to be understood. There is an
obligation upon you to deliver your message in such a way that it will have
the best possible chance to fulfill its mission.

Compacting in When you revise, tighten paragraphs to sentences, sentences to clauses,


Revision clauses to phrases, phrases to words, words to pictures, or strike the ideas
entirely.

Tightening Tightening, as it applies to writing means cutting extra words. Make every
word count. Inexperienced writers often use far more words than necessary.
They don’t attach enough value to the individual word. As a result, the
writing appears cluttered. The main ideas are hard to focus on because
unimportant words obstruct the interpretation.

Example:

At this point and time, we will break for lunch. (Too many words)

Now we will break for lunch. (Unimportant words removed)

Brevity Brevity is the minimum number of words to project the maximum idea or
thought of the writer. Below is an example that lacks brevity.

A document of three thousand words may be brief, and a hundred word memo
may be long: the first, if it comprehends many facts, several points of view,
and some choices: the latter if it is devoid of necessary facts, broken in its
thinking, and undetermined in its conclusion.

This is a good example:

A three thousand-word document may be brief if it lacks the necessary


information. A one hundred word memo may be long if it contains too much
information.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-48 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3


Compact Writing, Continued

Roundabout Multiplied across an entire letter, roundabout sentences do severe damage.


Sentences Ordinary English is shorter, clearer, and just as official. Below is an example
of a roundabout sentence, the n the sentence in correct English.

• It is necessary that we receive the operations order in this office by


21 January.

• We need the operation order by 21 January.

Summary This lesson showed you ways to be more selective in your vocabulary
selection and the proper use of personal pronouns. You also have the
knowledge of how to compact your writing through revisions, tightening, and
brevity. You will learn how to put the final touches on any document by
using this lesson as a guide.

MCI Course 8101 8-49 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3


Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated 10 minutes
Study Time

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your
answers against those listed at the end of the lesson.

Item 1 What is a personal pronoun?

a. A pronoun that expresses a distinction of a participants role


b. A pronoun that defines character principles
c. A pronoun that shows action
d. A pronoun combined with an adverb to show an active role

Item 2 Contractions link _______ with words and make verbs negative.

a. pronouns
b. adverbs
c. the subject
d. nouns

Item 3 Tightening means cutting extra ________ that do not contribute to your
message.

a. nouns
b. words
c. adverbs
d. contractions

Item 4 Brevity is the ___________ number of words to project the maximum idea or
thought of the writer.

a. target
b. perfect
c. maximum
d. minimum

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 8-50 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3 Exercise


Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the exercise items. If you have any
questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 8-44
2 a 8-46
3 b 8-48
4 d 8-48

MCI Course 8101 8-51 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3 Exercise


(This page intentionally left blank.)

MCI Course 8101 8-52 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3 Exercise


LEADERSHIP AND ADMINISTRATION
REVIEW LESSON EXAMINATION
Review Lesson

Introduction The purpose of the review lesson examination is to prepare you for the final
examination. We recommend that you try to complete your review lesson
examination without referring to the text, but for those items (questions) you
are unsure of, restudy the text. When you finish your review lesson and are
satisfied with your responses, check your responses against the answers
provided at the end of this review lesson examination.

Directions Select the ONE answer that BEST completes the statement or that answers
the item. Each question will be in the form of multiple choice, so circle your
response.

Item 1 Which of the following lists the four indicators of leadership?

a. Proficiency, morale, esprit de corps, discipline


b. Dedicated, competent, responsible, knowledgeable
c. Competent, discipline, esprit de corps, knowledgeable
d. Proficiency, morale, leadership, decisiveness

Item 2 Esprit de corps is best described as

a. guidelines for leadership principles.


b. a realistic approach to leadership.
c. the projection of the leader’s personality.
d. enthusiasm and loyalty to the unit.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-1 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Items 3 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the definition from
Through 7 column 2 that best describes the leadership trait in column 1. The answers in
column 2 may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Leadership Trait Definition

___ 3. Initiative a. Action in the absence of orders


___ 4. Loyalty b. Faithfulness to country
___ 5. Bearing c. Favorable impressions
___ 6. Judgment d. Ability to reach sound decisions
___ 7. Unselfishness e. Avoiding to provide for your own
comfort at the expense of others

Item 8 Keeping your personnel informed is which leadership principle?

a. Caring for others


b. Communication
c. Developing subordinates
d. Confirmation

Item 9 Knowing your Marines and looking out for their welfare is which leadership
principle?

a. Caring for others


b. Teamwork
c. Knowing capabilities
d. Self-improvement

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-2 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 10 Leadership style can be defined as the leader’s _________ pattern as


_________ by the Marines who the leader is attempting to influence, guide,
or direct.

a. physical; determined
b. behavioral; determined
c. perception; acknowledged
d. behavioral; perceived

Item 11 The leader defines limits and permits subordinates to make decisions can be
described as which leadership style?

a. Democratic
b. Delegating
c. Telling
d. Autocratic

Item 12 A military professional must have which three characteristics?

a. Competent, responsible, and dedicated


b. Expertise, careerism, and hard charging
c. Careerism, occupationalist, and enforcer
d. Expertise, ethics, and thoughtful

Item 13 Readiness and the individual’s ability to perform in combat is affected


negatively by

a. careerism and professionalism.


b. professionalism and occupationalism.
c. selfishness and individualism.
d. careerism and occupationalism.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-3 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 14 Which documents contain Military Code of Ethics?

a. Civil Disorders, Combat Training, Conduct or Inquiry


b. Profession of Arms, Philosophy of Leadership, Command Management
c. UCMJ, Code of Conduct, Oath of Office
d. DD214, FM 20-01, Military Leadership

Item 15 SNCOs have the responsibility for molding subordinates into Marines.
Which of the following is a method that SNCOs use to mold their subordinate
Marines?

a. Promise of promotion
b. Clear instructions
c. Displaying anger
d. Showing favoritism

Item 16 SNCOs must conduct day-to-day operations in an environment that

a. encourages subordinates to seek advice and counsel.


b. provides fair and impartial treatment.
c. accepts subordinates’ suggestions for improved performance.
d. all of the above.

Item 17 Which of the following describes the relationship between a SNCO and
senior officer?

a. Supporting and trusting


b. Selfish and withholding
c. Informal and familiar
d. Constructive and assuming

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-4 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 18 Which reference contains guidelines and standards for assignment of conduct
and proficiency marks?

a. MCO P1070.12 Individual Records Administration Manual (IRAM)


b. MCO P1080.35 Personnel Reporting Instruction Manual (PRIM)
c. MCO 1610.11 Performance Evaluations, Appeals Manual (PEAM)
d. MCO P1400.29 Marine Corps Promotion Manual (MARCORPROMAN)

Item 19 Which of the following are occasions for submitting proficiency and conduct
marks?

a. TAD 60 days or more and promotion


b. Enlistment and discharge
c. Completion of service school and discharge
d. Company NJP and reduction

Item 20 What are the effective dates when assigning semiannual proficiency and
conduct marks for regular Marines?

a. 1 January and 1 December


b. 1 July and 1 December
c. 1 October and 1 April
d. 31 January and 31 July

Item 21 What is the regular and reserve code for transfer?

a. TR
b. TRAN
c. TF
d. TD

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-5 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Items 22 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the filing instruction from
Through 25 column 2 that best matches the occasion in column 1. The answers in column
2 may not be used more than once.
Column 1 Column 2
Occasion Filing Instruction
___ 22. If the effective date for a. Report annual marks of Not
transfer coincides with the Applicable
requirement to report b. Transfer marks take precedence
semiannual marks c. Report annual marks
___ 23. If the Marine attends annual d. Annual marks take precedence
training within 90 days of
the effective date for
reporting annual marks
___ 24. If the Marine receives a
mark for any other occasion
within 90 days of the
effective date for reporting
annual marks
___ 25. If the effective date for
annual marks coincides with
any reporting occasion other
than promotion or transfer

Item 26 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending


proficiency marks?

a. Physical fitness and leadership


b. Timeliness and leadership
c. Trustworthiness and participation
d. Bearing and mission accomplishment

Item 27 Which of the following qualities are considered when recommending conduct
marks?
a. Cooperation and personal appearance
b. Adaptability and know how
c. Influence on others and interest
d. Individual character and leadership

Continued on next page


MCI Course 8101 R-6 Review Lesson Examination
Review Lesson, Continued

Item 28 Scenario: Lance Corporal White handles routine matters acceptably, but in
your opinion, he has not performed to the best of his abilities. Lance
Corporal White gets the job done; however, both you and the squad leader
have often found it necessary to supervise him closely when he is assigned a
task, which is not routine. You have encouraged Lance Corporal White to
take correspondence courses, but to date he has not enrolled himself. Several
times during the past 5 months, you have been obliged to counsel him for
leaving on liberty when his squad was not squared away. Lance Corporal
White has received one valid letter of indebtedness from a local merchant
during this marking period. He keeps himself in good physical condition. Of
your three squad leaders, Lance Corporal White is the least effective.

Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for


proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate?

a. Unsatisfactory and unsatisfactory


b. Below average and below average
c. Below average and average
d. Average and unsatisfactory

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-7 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 29 Scenario: Corporal Black is a real take-charge individual. He readily


assumes responsibility and uses his authority wisely. He requires only a
general outline of what is to be accomplished, then goes out, and completes
the assigned task in an expeditious, efficient manner. You have relied heavily
on Corporal Black’s ability to instruct in general military subjects. Since
making corporal, he has taken two MCI courses, The Marine NCO and The
Marine Rifle Platoon. Corporal Black completed both of these courses with
high final grades. His squad usually represents the best appearance and is the
best in the field at inspections and in drill. The members in his squad never
create disciplinary problems. Corporal Black keeps himself at the peak of
physical condition and ensures that his squad does likewise. His personal
appearance and habits are above reproach.

Considering this information, which corresponding adjective ratings for


proficiency and conduct marks are appropriate?

a. Excellent and average


b. Excellent and outstanding
c. Average and average
d. Outstanding and outstanding

Item 30 Families who are prepared and equipped with the skills and tools to
successfully meet the challenges of the military lifestyle is the definition of

a. family preparedness.
b. family readiness.
c. Marine Corps values.
d. key family planning.

Item 31 Where should a Marine go to obtain information about financial planning?

a. The commanding officer


b. The Marines platoon sergeant
c. Several credit unions and banks
d. Any financial institution

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-8 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 32 Which of the following is a means of contacting the Marine in an emergency


while they are away on deployment?

a. E-mail
b. Letter mail
c. MARS
d. Local Red Cross chapter

Item 33 Who is responsible for a family care plan?

a. Individual Marine
b. Platoon sergeant
c. Platoon commander
d. Company commander

Item 34 What type of planning should a Marine do before a deployment?

a. Legal
b. Sensible
c. Corrective
d. Mandatory

Item 35 What is the key emotional factor when planning for a deployment?

a. Money problems
b. Communication
c. Shock
d. Loneliness

Item 36 What is an example of how a pre-school child may be affected by a parent’s


absence due to a deployment?

a. Misdirected anger
b. Worry about family and finances
c. Eating difficulties
d. Low self-esteem

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-9 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 37 Letters, e-mail, calling cards, MARS calls, and morale calls are all examples
of ________________ during a deployment.

a. communication
b. being aware
c. staying up to date
d. ways of beating boredom

Item 38 What percentage does the government pay for a Marine who volunteers for
the dental coverage?

a. 90
b. 80
c. 75
d. 60

Item 39 The Navy Marine Corps Relief Society, American Red Cross, and the
Chaplain Corps are just three examples of

a. services provided by Marine Corps community services.


b. services within the key volunteer network.
c. key family organizations.
d. personal services.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-10 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 40 Who is authorized to approve emergency leave for more than 60 days?
a. The officer in charge
b. Commandant of the Marine Corps
c. Secretary of the Navy
d. Platoon commander

Item 41 Which of the following documents are required for family members and
Marines if traveling and taking leave overseas?
a. Original orders
b. ID card
c. Birth certificate
d. Passport

Item 42 When a Marine is deployed, his family can remain in base housing
a. only with written permission from the commanding officer.
b. for the entire duration of the Marine’s deployment.
c. if they pay 25 percent of the all amenities.
d. only if the Marine is deployed for less than 90 days.

Item 43 What are some of the changes to anticipate when returning home from
deployment?
a. Less family time
b. Over excitement
c. Very little changes in routine
d. Financial hardship

Item 44 Which of the following is one of the 10 commandments of a good


homecoming?
a. Thou shalt spend the extra deployment money on your family.
b. Thou shalt relax and let the spouse take care of all after deployment
expenses.
c. Thou shalt confess to a chaplain and not to a spouse.
d. Thou shalt confess to a spouse and not to a chaplain.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-11 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 45 What are some helpful Web links for personal and family readiness and
deployment preparedness?

a. Yahoo and Excite


b. Google and Ask Jeeves
c. United States Department of State and The United States Department of
Justice
d. United Servicemen Organizations and The United States Marine Corps

Item 46 What does debt-to-income ratio measure?

a. Current expenditures against your net income


b. Current obligations against your current income
c. Projected expenses against your expected income
d. Variable expenses against your gross income

Items 47 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter to determine the debt-to-
Through 49 income ratio in column 2 in the correct sequence in column 1. The answers in
column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Column 2

Correct Sequence Debt-to-Income Ratio

___47. a. Add the total minimum monthly


___48. payments on rent/mortgage, car,
___49. installment loans, and credit
cards.
b. Multiply gross income by .37.
c. Compare net income with
variable expenses.
d. Find the difference between total
monthly payments and 37 percent
of gross income.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-12 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Items 50 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the budget term in
Through 52 column 2 that best fits the sample in column 1. The answers in column 2 may
be used only once.

Column 1 Column 2

Sample Budget Term

___50. Mortgage a. Net income


___51. Salary minus taxes and b. Fixed expenses
social security c. Variable expenses
___52. Food d. Debt-to-income ratio

Items 53 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of financial goal
Through 55 in column 2 that best matches the example in column 1. The answers in
column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Column 2

Example Financial Goal

___53. Establish credit, invest, and a. Short-term


insure b. Mid-term
___54. Buy new car, pay for c. Long-term
college, afford retirement d. Temporary
___55. Get a job, create a budget,
save money

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-13 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 56 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the credit term in column
Through 58 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only
once.

Column 1 Column 2

Definition Credit Term

___ 56. Original loan amount a. Finance charge


___ 57. Percentage of the original b. Interest
loan amount c. Principle
___ 58. A charge for a financial
loan

Item 59 Credit lets you _______ now and _______ later and depends on your net
worth, income, and

a. buy; pay; principle.


b. save; pay; APR.
c. buy; pay; credit rating.
d. pay; save; credit line.

Item 60 Which of the following is not a disadvantage to having bad credit?

a. High interest rates


b. Competitive loan rates
c. Denied credit
d. Bad credit report

Item 61 The best guideline for lowering monthly payments or reducing the number of
payments is to

a. shop around for the best bargain.


b. put as much down as you can afford.
c. set strict credit limits for yourself.
d. reduce your debt to by paying bills off ahead of time.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-14 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 62 What basic items must you have when you open a savings account?

a. Source of income, rate of savings, and social security number


b. Social security number, interest rate, and minimum deposit
c. Services you want, interest rate you expect, and social security number
d. Name, address, social security number, and minimum deposit

Item 63 The traditional IRA requires you to have an adjusted gross income that does
not exceed _________ if you are single or _________ combined adjusted
gross income for married couples.

a. $24,000; $50,000
b. $33,000; $53,000
c. $50,000; $110,000
d. $50,000; $160,000

Item 64 Withdrawals from ___________ IRAs made prior to age 59½ are subject to
income tax plus a 10-percent penalty.

a. traditional
b. roth
c. SEP
d. roth and traditional

Item 65 Service group life insurance provides ________ life insurance to all active
duty personnel and ________ build cash value.

a. whole; does not


b. whole; does
c. term; does not
d. term; does

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-15 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Items 66 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of insurance
Through 68 from column 2 that is defined in column 1. You may use the answers in
column 2 only once.

Column 1 Column 2

Definition Type of Insurance

___ 66. Five-year term insurance a. VGLI


policy available upon b. Level term
separation. c. Adjustment
___ 67. Insurance that pays a lump d. Endowment
sum or income to the
policyholder that lives to a
certain age or after a certain
amount is paid.
___ 68. Insurance where the amount
of insurance remains the
same over each renewal
period, but the cost
increases at the start of each
renewal.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-16 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 69 When reviewing the criteria for choosing a life insurance policy, what are
three insurance rights that you should check before choosing a company
policy?

a. The company lets you correct mistaken personal information before they
turn you down, you can dispute their cancellation of insurance, and you
must pay the premium for the time the policy is in force even if you
cancel the policy.
b. The company is licensed in the state, you can cancel a policy any time,
and you can ask how personal information will be used and can correct
mistaken information.
c. The company is an A-rated company, is licensed in the state, and you read
the policy before buying the insurance.
d. The company gives you guidelines about your responsibilities, you can
cancel the policy any time, and you can correct any information that
resulted in you being turned down for insurance.

Items 70 and 71 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the approach to determine
the amount of insurance you need in column 2 with the description that best
matches it in column 1. You may use the answers in column 2 only once.

Column 1 Column 2

Description Approach

___70. Multiplies current earnings a. Multiple earnings


by a factor of 5 times 12 b. Needs
months and adds the amount c. Common sense
of unpaid home mortgage, d. Multiple needs
plus $50,000 for each child
living at home to determine
amount of insurance needed
___71. Calculates future financial
expenses of your family
(car, house, and education)
to determine amount of
insurance needed

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-17 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 72 According to recent federal government statistics, over _____ percent of men
and women of all races are overweight or obese.

a. 30
b. 32
c. 34
d. 36

Item 73 From the commander’s perspective, which of the following is not a benefit of
physical fitness?

a. Less sick time


b. Increased combat readiness
c. More motivated marines
d. Personal satisfaction

Item 74 According to Marine Corps Order 6100.12, every Marine must be

a. between the ages of 18 and 45 with a good positive outlook and be


physically fit.
b. physically fit, regardless of age, grade, or duty assignment.
c. physically fit with the exception of assignment to commands in high
elevations.
d. physically fit between the ages of 17 and 45, no restrictions on grade or
duty assignment.

Item 75 Define physical fitness.

a. A state of good physical health. A physically fit body that is functioning


properly, and beyond that, functioning well.
b. A state of reasonably good health. A physically fit body that is
functioning well.
c. A well conditioned Marine whose body can adapt for variations in climate
and terrain.
d. A Marine who has a combination of muscular endurance, strength, and
flexibility.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-18 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 76 What is the definition of flexibility?

a. A measure of the percentage of a person’s body mass that is lean tissue


and not body fat
b. The ability to move a body part through a complete range of motion with
no pain
c. The ability to move a body part with little or no pain involved
d. The ability to move a body part through a complete range of motion

Item 77 What Marine Corps order states the objective, purpose, and conditioning
principles of the Marine Corps physical fitness program?

a. MCO P5600.31G
b. MCO P1610.7E
c. MCO P1040.31H
d. MCO P6100.12

Item 78 Which one of the following goals is a part of the Marine Corps Physical
Conditioning Program?

a. Develop Marines who are capable of performing their duties anywhere.


b. Develop Marines who are physically capable of performing their duties
anywhere.
c. Contribute to the health and well being of every Marine through regular
exercise and health education.
d. Contribute to the health of every Marine through regular exercise.

Item 79 Which of the following is not a basic nutrient?

a. Protein and carbohydrates


b. Fat and vitamins
c. Minerals and water
d. Fiber and sugar

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-19 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 80 Which nutrient serves primarily in a structure role?

a. Protein
b. Carbohydrates
c. Fat
d. Vitamins

Item 81 Which nutrient is used primarily as an energy source?

a. Protein
b. Carbohydrates
c. Fat
d. Vitamins

Item 82 Which nutrient is used primarily as a source of energy for the body?

a. Protein
b. Carbohydrates
c. Fat
d. Vitamins

Item 83 Which nutrient, when found in excess, is converted to fat?

a. Protein
b. Carbohydrates
c. Fiber
d. Minerals

Item 84 According to the food guide pyramid, how many servings from the milk,
yogurt, and cheese group should you receive each day?

a. One to two
b. Two to three
c. Three to four
d. Four to five

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-20 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 85 What is the description for reference, MCO P5000.12D?

a. Pregnancy and Parenthood


b. Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual
c. Individual Records Administration Manual
d. Separation and Retirement Manual

Item 86 What does MCO P1900.16F relate to?

a. Pregnancy and Parenthood


b. Personnel Reporting Instructions Manual
c. Individual Records Administration Manual
d. Separation and Retirement Manual

Item 87 What is the description for reference, MCO P1070.12K?

a. Performance Evaluation System


b. Marine Corps Physical Fitness Test and Body Composition Program
Manual
c. Individual Records Administration Manual
d. Pregnancy and Parenthood

Item 88 What is the recommended caloric intake for normal adults?

a. 1,000
b. 1,100
c. 1,200
d. 12,000

Item 89 In order to produce a 1- to 2-pound loss per week, you must reduce your daily
caloric intake by how many calories?

a. 100 to 200
b. 250 to 750
c. 500 to 1,000
d. 1,000 to 2,000

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-21 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 90 What is congestive heart failure a sign of?

a. Workout too heavy


b. Starvation diet or fasting
c. Workout too light
d. Excessive upper body workout

Item 91 What are the four components of a weight loss program?

a. Moderate caloric reduction, aerobic exercise, strength training, and a low-


fat diet
b. Major caloric reduction, aerobic exercise, strength training, and a fat-free
diet
c. Caloric reduction, anaerobic exercise, isometric exercise, and a low-fat
diet
d. Moderate caloric reduction, anaerobic exercise, strength training, and a
low-fat diet

Item 92 What is the primary determinant of your resting metabolic rate?

a. Total body fat


b. Total caloric intake
c. Body weight
d. Total lean body mass

Item 93 What is the purpose of the Fitness Report Audit Program (FRAP)?

a. Provides a process for Marines to ensure the accuracy and completeness


of performance records
b. Gives Marines an opportunity to argue disagreements
c. Provides insight on the Marine Corps Total Force System (MCTFS)
d. Places performance records in the hands of the Reporting Senior (RS)

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-22 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 94 Which of the following are references that contain information on


performance records?

a. MCO P1070.12_Marine Corps Individual Records Administration


Manual (IRAM)
b. MCO P1610.7_Performance Evaluation System (PES)
c. MCO P1080.40_Marine Corps Total Force System Personnel Reporting
Instructions Manual (MCTFSPRIM)
d. All of the above

Item 95 The purpose of the Master Brief Sheet (MBS) is to

a. provide statistical data of a Marine’s proficiency and conduct.


b. provide key personal data and a summary of a Marine’s performance
evaluation record.
c. provide a listing of a Marine’s fitness report from most recent to oldest.
d. explain in detail all reviewing officer remarks.

Item 96 Which are two sections of the Master Brief Sheet?

a. Header Data and Fitness Report Listing


b. Top and Bottom Section
c. Header Data and Reviewing Officer Remarks
d. Correcting Authority and Master Brief Sheet Listing

Item 97 Name, social security number, and rank description on the Master Brief Sheet
are corrected via

a. CMC (MMPR).
b. The Unit Diary.
c. CMC (MA).
d. Active CMC (MMOA).

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-23 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Items 98 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from
Through 102 column 2 that best describes the listing in column 1. The answers in column 2
may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Listing Description

___ 98. #RPTS@PROC a. Number of fitness reports written


___ 99. Promotion by RS on Marines of same grade
___ 100. Organization/School as MRO as of time of processing
___ 101. OCC report
___ 102. REL VAL@PROC b. RS promotion recommendation
c. Command or unit to which the
Marine was assigned for duty
d. Occasion for submitting report
e. Relative value of the MRO
fitness report based on the RS’s
rating history for Marines of the
same grade as the MRO

Item 103 The OMPF provides a(n) ______ of the Marine’s ______ from entrance into
the Marine Corps until the present.

a. analysis; statistics
b. history; career
c. snapshot; data
d. report; production

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-24 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Items 104 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the description from
Through 108 column 2 that best describes the folder in column 1. The answers in column 2
may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

Folder Description

___ 104. Service a. Documents on civilian and


___ 105. Commendatory/Derogatory military education, personal
___ 106. Health/Dental awards, and other material
___ 107. Performance pertinent to selection, assignment,
___ 108. Field and retention decisions
b. Unless broken service, no records
are held
c. Contract information, discharge
documents, reserve documents,
orders to active duty, and general
administrative and service
documents to compute service
time for benefits program or
retirement
d. Fitness reports and standard
addendum pages for sergeants and
above
e. Contains documents from
previous OQR/SRBs if a Marine
has periods of broken service

Item 109 Marines should request a copy of their OMPF for review and correction under
which circumstance?

a. At least once every 2 years


b. At least 12 months prior to the convening board
c. At least 12 months prior to applying for programs such as the Warrant
Officer and Marine Corps Enlisted Commissioning Education Program
d. All of the above

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-25 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 110 The Performance Evaluation Section (PES) of the Personnel Management
Support Branch (MMSB) provides essential data to _________ CMC’s
personnel management responsibilities.

a. support
b. enhance
c. influence
d. maximize

Item 111 Policy and Research Unit (MMSB-31) is responsible for fitness report policy,
research, correction, and accountability for all

a. officers.
b. active duty personnel.
c. reserve Marines.
d. enlisted Marines.

Item 112 Which of the following personnel are authorized to endorse fitness reports
that require administrative corrections?

a. Reporting senior (RS)


b. Administrative officer (AO)
c. Reviewing officer (RO)
d. a and b
e. a and c

Item 113 To warrant a correction of a date gap, the date gap must be how many days
delinquent?

a. 30 or more
b. 30 or less
c. 31 or longer
d. 31 or less

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-26 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 114 Which of the following are components of the basic individual record (BIR)?

a. Foreign language, record status, and date of birth


b. Name, SSN, EAS, and record status
c. SSN, marital status, and current rifle qualification
d. Army radio code, service spouse’s SSN, and name

Item 115 Which of the following are components of the Basic Training Record (BTR)?

a. PFT, service schools code/year, and dependent certification code


b. BST/EST, security clearance, citizenship, and religion
c. T/O number/line number, date of birth, and security investigation/type
d. Current pistol qualification, local schools, and PFT

Item 116 What are the occasions for conducting an audit of the BIR and BTR?

a. A Marine retires
b. An annual inspection
c. A Marine joins a unit and triennially
d. A Marine reenlists

Item 117 To report additions, deletions, and change missing or erroneous data on the
BIR or BTR, ______________ entries are made.

a. unit diary
b. historical data
c. administrative
d. central master file

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-27 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 118 Which type of information is contained in a file?

a. Written correspondence
b. Electronic correspondence
c. Verbal correspondence
d. Televised correspondence

Item 119 What is the Kraft folder mainly used for?

a. Mailing correspondence
b. Displaying correspondence
c. Filing correspondence
d. Routing correspondence

Item 120 How many major subject groups are in the Navy’s SSIC system?

a. 10
b. 12
c. 13
d. 20

Item 121 What document is used to revise the department of the Navy SSICs and
department of the Navy file maintenance procedures?

a. SECNAVINST 5210.11D
b. SECNAVINST 5212.5
c. SECNAVINST 5215.1
d. SECNAVINST 5216.5

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-28 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Items 122 Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the SSIC designator from
Through 126 column 2 that best describes the general category in column 1. The answers
in column 2 may not be used more than once.

Column 1 Column 2

General Category SSIC Designator

___ 122. Telecommunications a. 4000 to 4999


___ 123. Logistics b. 6000 to 6999
___ 124. Medicine and Dentistry c. 2000 to 2999
___ 125. Ordnance Material d. 12000 to 12999
___ 126. Civilian Personnel e. 8000 to 8999

Item 127 Which task is accomplished through directives?

a. Modifies authority and changes responsibility


b. Regulates another directive
c. Directs courses of action or conduct
d. Conducts training

Item 128 Which directive is used to publish material that is either primarily informative
or otherwise directive in nature?

a. Orders
b. Bulletins
c. Letters
d. Messages

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-29 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 129 Which type of order does the letter “P” preceding the SSIC identify?

a. Letter
b. ALMAR
c. 5-paragraph
d. Manual

Item 130 What are communications used to transmit written ideas and messages called?

a. Recording
b. Photo analysis
c. Correspondence
d. Video

Item 131 What publication is used to prescribe uniform standards for management and
preparation of correspondence?

a. SECNAVINST 5216.5
b. MCO 5215
c. SECNAVINST 5210.11
d. MCO 5600.48

Item 132 Use automated office equipment to increase efficiency, is an example of


guidelines for

a. using office equipment.


b. writing correspondence.
c. sending messages.
d. improving employer/employee relations.

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-30 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 133 Which part of a paragraph restates the main idea of the paragraph using
different words?

a. Supporting details
b. Topic sentence
c. Subject sentence
d. Closing sentence

Item 134 Which line of a standard letter consists of a sentence fragment that tells
readers what the letter is about?

a. Enclosure
b. Reference
c. Subject
d. Text

Item 135 The distribution block of a multiple-address letter is used when you have

a. more than four addressees.


b. addressees from separate commands.
c. less than four addressees.
d. a group title of unknown distribution.

Item 136 Which memorandum format is used when direct liaison with individuals
outside the command is authorized?

a. Plain-paper
b. From-To
c. Letterhead
d. Memorandum For

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-31 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 137 What is a stand-alone document that presents the essential elements of a
subject?

a. Business letter
b. Discussion paper
c. Standard letter
d. Point paper

Item 138 Which type of publication contains a narrower focus detailing tactics,
techniques, and procedures used in the prosecution of war and other assigned
tasks?

a. MCWP
b. MCDP
c. JMEM
d. MCRP

Item 139 Which Internet Web site lists multi-service publications?

a. www.doctrine.usmc.mil
b. www.dtic.mil/doctrine
c. www.dtic.mil/alsa
d. www.nwdc.navy.smil.mil

Item 140 What online interactive system is used to request and distribute publications?

a. MCAIS
b. MCPDS
c. MCLB
d. MCU

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-32 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 141 What information is required when requesting a publication?

a. Price per copy


b. Delivery date
c. Source document
d. Shipping preference

Item 142 Managing and controlling the organization’s classified material is a function
of the

a. operations section.
b. security manager.
c. executive officer.
d. directives control point.

Item 143 What is the principle of critical thinking?

a. The ability to combine observations, experiences, and theoretical


solutions into a practical problem
b. The ability to combine observations and experiences into a practical
problem
c. Defining the objective then revising it for clarity
d. Dividing the objective into components then revising it for clarity

Item 144 Which of the following is not a principle of critical thinking?

a. Define the objective


b. Divide the objective into components
c. Gather data
d. Clarity

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-33 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 145 What are inferences?

a. Conclusions based on evidence, environmental factors, and/or experience


if it is applicable to the objective
b. Conclusions based on evidence and experience if it is applicable to the
objective
c. Conclusions based on evidence and environmental factors that are
applicable to the objective
d. Assumptions based on evidence and environmental factors that are
applicable to the objective

Item 146 What are implications?

a. An implied resolution
b. An implication occurs when a claim or truth follows two or more
premises, which are conclusions drawn from experience or application
c. A claim drawn from conclusions
d. A claim or conclusion that is drawn from an implied resolution,
experience, or an application

Item 147 What are consequences?

a. The ability to evaluate an objective or analyze a problem


b. The outcome from evaluating an objective or a problem
c. Results from an implication from certain circumstances
d. Results from an action or condition

Item 148 Which of the following is not a component of preparation in reference to


critical thinking?

a. Reading
b. Listening
c. Discussing
d. Reworking

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-34 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Item 149 What is chunking?

a. A questioning technique that will break each paragraph down to a single


sentence
b. The removal of unnecessary adverbs and conjunctions
c. The removal of unnecessary adverbs only
d. A questioning technique that will break the topic into smaller pieces

Item 150 Define writing purpose.

a. The goal or what the document is supposed to accomplish


b. To mind map a document
c. The goal of the thesis alone
d. The information the writer is trying to relay to the reader in the simpliest
form

Item 151 What is brevity?

a. The effective use of conjunctions and adverbs within a sentence


b. Removing entire sentences from a document just to make the paragraph
shorter
c. The minimum number of words to project the maximum idea or thought
of the writer
d. The minimum number of words used to simplify the sentence to an eighth
grade reading level

MCI Course 8101 R-35 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Answers The table below lists the answers to the review lesson examination items. If
you have questions about these items, refer to the reference page of the course
text.

Item Number Answer Reference


1 a 1-4
2 d 1-4
3 a 1-6
4 b 1-6
5 c 1-5
6 d 1-6
7 e 1-6
8 b 1-7
9 a 1-7
10 d 1-9
11 b 1-9
12 a 1-14
13 d 1-15
14 c 1-15
15 b 1-17
16 d 1-18
17 a 1-20
18 a 2-5
19 c 2-6
20 d 2-6
21 a 2-6
22 b 2-7
23 c 2-7
24 a 2-7
25 d 2-7
26 a 2-12
27 c 2-14
28 b 2-13, 2-15
29 d 2-13, 2-16
30 b 3-5
31 c 3-6

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-36 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Answers,
continued

Item Number Answer Reference


32 d 3-11
33 a 3-16
34 a 3-17
35 d 3-24
36 c 3-29
37 a 3-37
38 d 3-42
39 c 3-46
40 b 3-53
41 d 3-54
42 b 3-56
43 a 3-68
44 c 3-71
45 d 3-72
46 b 4-4
47 b 4-4
48 a 4-4
49 d 4-4
50 b 4-7
51 a 4-7
52 c 4-7
53 b 4-14
54 c 4-15
55 a 4-14
56 c 4-19
57 a 4-19
58 b 4-19
59 c 4-18
60 b 4-21
61 b 4-22
62 d 4-30
63 b 4-32

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-37 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Answers,
continued

Item Number Answer Reference


64 a 4-35
65 c 4-41
66 a 4-42
67 d 4-44
68 b 4-43
69 b 4-46
70 a 4-48
71 c 4-58
72 a 5-4
73 d 5-6
74 b 5-4
75 a 5-10
76 b 5-10
77 d 5-4
78 d 5-12
79 d 5-19
80 a 5-19
81 b 5-19
82 c 5-20
83 a 5-19
84 b 5-29
85 a 5-35
86 d 5-35
87 c 5-35
88 c 5-36
89 c 5-37
90 b 5-36
91 a 5-37
92 d 5-37
93 a 6-5
94 d 6-7
95 b 6-8
96 a 6-8

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-38 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Answers,
continued

Item Number Answer Reference


97 b 6-8
98 a 6-11
99 b 6-11
100 c 6-10
101 d 6-10
102 e 6-11
103 b 6-12
104 c 6-12
105 a 6-12
106 b 6-12
107 d 6-12
108 e 6-12
109 d 6-13
110 a 6-20
111 b 6-20
112 e 6-22
113 c 6-24
114 b 6-31
115 d 6-31
116 c 6-32
117 a 6-33
118 a 7-4
119 c 7-4
120 c 7-6
121 a 7-6
122 c 7-7
123 a 7-8
124 b 7-8
125 e 7-9
126 d 7-10
127 c 7-13
128 b 7-14
129 d 7-14

Continued on next page

MCI Course 8101 R-39 Review Lesson Examination


Review Lesson, Continued

Answers,
continued

Item Number Answer Reference


130 c 7-22
131 a 7-22
132 b 7-22
133 d 7-23
134 c 7-27
135 a 7-34
136 c 7-41
137 d 7-45
138 a 7-58
139 c 7-61
140 b 7-62
141 c 7-63
142 d 7-64
143 a 8-4
144 d 8-6
145 a 8-9
146 b 8-9
147 d 8-9
148 d 8-12
149 d 8-14
150 a 8-26
151 c 8-48

MCI Course 8101 R-40 Review Lesson Examination

You might also like